®

4-inch and 6-inch Color Micro-Graphic Panels Hardware User Manual
EA1-TCL-M

C-more 6” Color Micro-Graphic Panel shown in Portrait Mode C-more 6” Color Micro-Graphic Panel shown in Landscape Mode C-more 4” Color Micro-Graphic Panel shown in Landscape Mode

C-more 6” Color Micro-Graphic Panel Installed in a 21-button Portrait Keypad Bezel EA-MG6-BZ2P

C-more 6” Color Micro-Graphic Panel Installed in a 20-button Landscape Keypad Bezel EA-MG6-BZ2

®

Graphic Color Panels EA1-T4CL & EA1-T6CL

HARDWARE USER MANUAL

Please include the Manual Number and the Manual Issue, both shown below, when communicating with Technical Support regarding this publication.
Manual Number: Issue: Issue Date: EA1-TCL-M 2nd Edition Rev. A 07/13 Publication History
Issue
1st Edition 2nd Edition Rev. A

Date
12/09 10/10 07/13

Description of Changes
Original issue Added 4-inch panel Added hardware version info. Revised cable diagrams. Added CSA information. Added operating system info. Added Productivity Series and Do-more information.

WARNING
Thank you for purchasing automation equipment from Automationdirect.com®, doing business as, AutomationDirect. We want your new automation equipment to operate safely. Anyone who installs or uses this equipment should read this publication (and any other relevant publications) before installing or operating the equipment. To minimize the risk of potential safety problems, you should follow all applicable local and national codes that regulate the installation and operation of your equipment. These codes vary from area to area and usually change with time. It is your responsibility to determine which codes should be followed, and to verify that the equipment, installation, and operation is in compliance with the latest revision of these codes. At a minimum, you should follow all applicable sections of the National Fire Code, National Electrical Code, and the codes of the National Electrical Manufacturer's Association (NEMA). There may be local regulatory or government offices that can also help determine which codes and standards are necessary for safe installation and operation. Equipment damage or serious injury to personnel can result from the failure to follow all applicable codes and standards. We do not guarantee the products described in this publication are suitable for your particular application, nor do we assume any responsibility for your product design, installation, or operation. Our products are not fault-tolerant and are not designed, manufactured or intended for use or resale as online control equipment in hazardous environments requiring fail-safe performance, such as in the operation of nuclear facilities, aircraft navigation or communication systems, air traffic control, direct life support machines, or weapons systems, in which the failure of the product could lead directly to death, personal injury, or severe physical or environmental damage ("High Risk Activities"). AutomationDirect specifically disclaims any expressed or implied warranty of fitness for High Risk Activities. For additional warranty and safety information, see the Terms and Conditions section of our catalog. If you have any questions concerning the installation or operation of this equipment, or if you need additional information, please call us at 770-844-4200. This publication is based on information that was available at the time it was printed. At AutomationDirect we constantly strive to improve our products and services, so we reserve the right to make changes to the products and/or publications at any time without notice and without any obligation. This publication may also discuss features that may not be available in certain revisions of the product.

Trademarks
This publication may contain references to products produced and/or offered by other companies. The product and company names may be trademarked and are the sole property of their respective owners. AutomationDirect disclaims any proprietary interest in the marks and names of others.
Copyright 2013, Automationdirect.com® Incorporated All Rights Reserved

No part of this manual shall be copied, reproduced, or transmitted in any way without the prior, written consent of Automationdirect.com® Incorporated. AutomationDirect retains the exclusive rights to all information included in this document.

ADVERTENCIA
Gracias por comprar equipo de automatización de Automationdirect.com®. Deseamos que su nuevo equipo de automatización opere de manera segura. Cualquier persona que instale o use este equipo debe leer esta publicación (y cualquier otra publicación pertinente) antes de instalar u operar el equipo. Para reducir al mínimo el riesgo debido a problemas de seguridad, debe seguir todos los códigos de seguridad locales o nacionales aplicables que regulan la instalación y operación de su equipo. Estos códigos varian de área en área y usualmente cambian con el tiempo. Es su responsabilidad determinar cuales códigos deben ser seguidos y verificar que el equipo, instalación y operación estén en cumplimiento con la revisión mas reciente de estos códigos. Como mínimo, debe seguir las secciones aplicables del Código Nacional de Incendio, Código Nacional Eléctrico, y los códigos de (NEMA) la Asociación Nacional de Fabricantes Eléctricos de USA. Puede haber oficinas de normas locales o del gobierno que pueden ayudar a determinar cuales códigos y normas son necesarios para una instalación y operación segura. Si no se siguen todos los códigos y normas aplicables, puede resultar en daños al equipo o lesiones serias a personas. No garantizamos los productos descritos en esta publicación para ser adecuados para su aplicación en particular, ni asumimos ninguna responsabilidad por el diseño de su producto, la instalación u operación. Nuestros productos no son tolerantes a fallas y no han sido diseñados, fabricados o intencionados para uso o reventa como equipo de control en línea en ambientes peligrosos que requieren una ejecución sin fallas, tales como operación en instalaciones nucleares, sistemas de navegación aérea, o de comunicación, control de tráfico aéreo, máquinas de soporte de vida o sistemas de armamentos en las cuales la falla del producto puede resultar directamente en muerte, heridas personales, o daños físicos o ambientales severos ("Actividades de Alto Riesgo"). Automationdirect.com específicamente rechaza cualquier garantía ya sea expresada o implicada para actividades de alto riesgo. Para información adicional acerca de garantía e información de seguridad, vea la sección de Términos y Condiciones de nuestro catálogo. Si tiene alguna pregunta sobre instalación u operación de este equipo, o si necesita información adicional, por favor llámenos al número 770-844-4200 en Estados Unidos. Esta publicación está basada en la información disponible al momento de impresión. En Automationdirect.com nos esforzamos constantemente para mejorar nuestros productos y servicios, así que nos reservamos el derecho de hacer cambios al producto y/o a las publicaciones en cualquier momento sin notificación y sin ninguna obligación. Esta publicación también puede discutir características que no estén disponibles en ciertas revisiones del producto.

Marcas Registradas
Esta publicación puede contener referencias a productos producidos y/u ofrecidos por otras compañías. Los nombres de las compañías y productos pueden tener marcas registradas y son propiedad única de sus respectivos dueños. Automationdirect.com, renuncia cualquier interés propietario en las marcas y nombres de otros. PROPIEDAD LITERARIA 2013, AUTOMATIONDIRECT.COM® INCORPORATED Todos los derechos reservados No se permite copiar, reproducir, o transmitir de ninguna forma ninguna parte de este manual sin previo consentimiento por escrito de Automationdirect.com® Incorprated. Automationdirect.com retiene los derechos exclusivos a toda la información incluida en este documento. Los usuarios de este equipo pueden copiar este documento solamente para instalar, configurar y mantener el equipo correspondiente. También las instituciones de enseñanza pueden usar este manual para propósitos educativos.

respecter toutes les sections applicables du Code national de prévention des incendies. Copyright 2013. AutomationDirect. Si vous avez des questions au sujet de l'installation ou du fonctionnement de cet équipement. Afin de réduire au minimum le risque d'éventuels problèmes de sécurité. Pour des renseignements additionnels touchant la garantie et la sécurité. pour lesquels la défaillance du produit peut provoquer la mort. sans préavis ni quelque obligation que ce soit. La présente publication peut aussi porter sur des caractéristiques susceptibles de ne pas être offertes dans certaines versions révisées du produit. Des organismes de réglementation ou des services gouvernementaux locaux peuvent également vous aider à déterminer les codes ainsi que les normes à respecter pour assurer une installation et un fonctionnement sûrs. vous devez respecter tous les codes locaux et nationaux applicables régissant l'installation et le fonctionnement de votre équipement.AVERTISSEMENT Nous vous remercions d'avoir acheté l'équipement d'automatisation de Automationdirect. les systèmes de navigation aérienne ou de communication. Ces codes diffèrent d'une région à l'autre et. l'installation et le fonctionnement sont conformes aux exigences de la version la plus récente de ces codes. . habituellement. Automationdirect. veuillez consulter la section Modalités et conditions de notre documentation. Toute personne qui installe ou utilise cet équipement doit lire la présente publication (et toutes les autres publications pertinentes) avant de l'installer ou de l'utiliser. Vous devez. de l'installation ou du fonctionnement de votre produit. le contrôle de la circulation aérienne. par exemple. l'exploitation d'installations nucléaires. AutomationDirect conserve les droits exclusifs à l'égard de tous les renseignements contenus dans le présent document. nous nous efforçons constamment d'améliorer nos produits et services. Nous ne garantissons pas que les produits décrits dans cette publication conviennent à votre application particulière et nous n'assumons aucune responsabilité à l'égard de la conception. des blessures corporelles ou de graves dommages matériels ou environnementaux («activités à risque élevé»). Nos produits ne sont pas insensibles aux défaillances et ne sont ni conçus ni fabriqués pour l'utilisation ou la revente en tant qu'équipement de commande en ligne dans des environnements dangereux nécessitant une sécurité absolue. ou encore si vous avez besoin de renseignements supplémentaires. reproduite ou transmise de quelque façon que ce soit sans le consentement préalable écrit de la société Automationdirect.com® Incorporated Tous droits réservés Nulle partie de ce manuel ne doit être copiée. La société AutomationDirect nie toute garantie expresse ou implicite d'aptitude à l'emploi en ce qui a trait aux activités à risque élevé. Les désignations des produits et des entreprises peuvent être des marques de commerce et appartiennent exclusivement à leurs propriétaires respectifs. n'hésitez pas à nous téléphoner au 770-844-4200. AutomationDirect nie tout intérêt dans les autres marques et désignations. du Code national de l'électricité et des codes de la National Electrical Manufacturer's Association (NEMA). Cette publication s'appuie sur l'information qui était disponible au moment de l'impression. À la société AutomationDirect. Nous tenons à ce que votre nouvel équipement d'automatisation fonctionne en toute sécurité. les équipements de survie ou les systèmes d'armes. à tout le moins. L'omission de respecter la totalité des codes et des normes applicables peut entraîner des dommages à l'équipement ou causer de graves blessures au personnel. en faisant des affaires comme. Il vous incombe de déterminer les codes à respecter et de vous assurer que l'équipement. Marques de commerce La présente publication peut contenir des références à des produits fabriqués ou offerts par d'autres entreprises.com®. évoluent au fil du temps.com® Incorporated. C'est pourquoi nous nous réservons le droit d'apporter des modifications aux produits ou aux publications en tout temps.

.

. . . .1–7 Step 1 – Unpack and Inspect . . . .1–2 Conventions Used .1–6 Quick Start Steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1–18 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1–14 Step 7 – Providing Power to the C-more Color Micro-Graphic Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1–8 Step 3 – Become Familiar with Available Communication Ports . . . . . . . . . . . .EA1-T4CL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .TABLE OF CONTENTS Chapter 1: Getting Started . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1–10 Enclosure Clearances . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1–6 Product Label Examples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1–4 Product Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1–7 Step 2 – Install Optional Hardware Accessories (EA1-T6CL) . . . . . .1–3 Product Overview .EA1-T6CL . . . .1–16 Step 9 – Choose C-more Color Micro-Graphic Panel to PLC Protocol & Cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1–9 Step 4 – Install C-more Color Micro-Graphic Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1–15 Step 8 – Accessing the C-more Color Micro-Graphic Panel Setup Screens . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1–5 Agency Approvals . . . .1–12 Step 5 – Install the Programming Software and Develop a Project .1–13 Step 6 – Connect C-more Color Micro-Graphic Panel to Computer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1–17 Step 10 – Connect C-more Color Micro-Graphic Panel to PLC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1–6 Serial Number and Date Code format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1–5 Part Number Key . . . .1–1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . .5–5 Information Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4–2 Introduction . . . . . . .4–4 Wiring Guidelines . . . . . . . .4–5 Chapter 5: System Setup Screens . . . . .3–12 Clear Screen Overlay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2–1 Available Models . . . . . . . .4–1 Safety Guidelines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2–2 EA1-T4CL Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . .3–6 21-Button Portrait (Vertical) Keypad Bezel for 6-inch Panels . . . . . . . . . . .2–3 EA1-T6CL Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3–3 20-Button Landscape (Horizontal) Keypad Bezel for 6-inch Panels . . . . . . .5–3 System Setup Screens Flowchart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5–6 ii ® EA1-TCL-M Hardware User Manual. . .3–12 D-SUB 15-pin to Terminal Block Adapter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2–7 EA1-T6CL Panel Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3–2 C-more Micro-Graphic Programming Software . . . . . . . . . . .5–4 Setup Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2–5 EA1-T4CL Panel Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3–13 Chapter 4: Installation and Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2–9 Chemical Compatibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 07/13 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3–9 D-SUB 15-pin 90-degree Communication Port Adapter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4–3 Panel Cutout Dimensions . . . . . Rev. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5–1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2–8 Communications Port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2–10 Chapter 3: Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5–2 Accessing the System Setup Screens . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2nd Ed. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3–1 Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Table of Contents Chapter 2: Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . A. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Mitsubishi. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6–24 RS-422A Multi-Drop Wiring Diagram Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5–12 Test Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Modicon and Siemens . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6–16 User Constructed Cables – Wiring Diagrams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5–9 Clear User Memory . . .5–15 Touch Panel Test . . . . . . Rev. . .6–36 ® EA1-TCL-M Hardware User Manual. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5–14 PLC Enquiry Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5–16 Exit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Table of Contents Setting Menu . . .6–2 C-more Micro-Graphic Communication Ports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Loop Back Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6–5 Allen-Bradley . . . . .5–13 Serial Port2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6–5 Compatibility and Connection Charts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6–5 RS-422A/RS-485A Communications . . . . . . . .6–2 Available PLC Protocols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2nd Ed. . . . . . . . . . .5–8 Calibration . Omron.5–16 Display Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5–7 Touch/Key Beep . . . . . . . . .6–5 Cables from AutomationDirect . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5–7 Brightness . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6–1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6–14 Cables from AutomationDirect – Wiring Diagrams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 07/13 iii . . . . .6–4 DirectLOGIC PLCs Password Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6–5 AutomationDirect Controllers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5–17 Chapter 6: PLC Communications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5–15 Buzzer Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5–10 Reset to Factory Default . . . . . . . . .6–34 RS-485A Multi-Drop Wiring Diagram Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5–11 Rotation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6–5 GE. . . . . . . . . . . . . .5–10 Hourglass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Rev. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9–2 Replacement Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7–3 Check Physical Conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9–3 iv ® EA1-TCL-M Hardware User Manual. . . . . . . . . . . . . 2nd Ed. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7–2 Check Operating Voltage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9–1 Replacement Parts Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8–7 Panel & PLC Error Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8–5 No Communications between Panel and PLC . .8–9 Reset to Factory Default . . . . . A. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8–10 Electrical Noise Problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7–5 Check Project Functionality . . .7–1 Project Backup .7–2 Check Transmit and Receive Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7–2 Check Operating Environment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8–3 Lost Firmware – Red ‘Update Mode’ Screen Displayed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7–3 Run Tests under the System Setup Screens . . . . . . .8–1 C-more Micro-Graphic Panel does not Power up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8–2 Display is Dim . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7–4 Check Settings under the System Setup Screens . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Table of Contents Chapter 7: Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7–5 Cleaning the Display Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7–6 Chapter 8: Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8–4 No Communications between Panel and PC (Personal Computer) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8–10 Chapter 9: Replacement Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 07/13 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8–4 Updating Firmware . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9–2 Customizing the Function Keys Insert Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8–8 C-more Micro-Graphic Panel Runtime Errors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7–6 Checks from the C-more Micro-Graphic Programming Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8–2 Display is Blank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8–3 No User Program . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .A–7 DirectLOGIC – DirectNET PLC Error Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .A–26 Omron FINS Protocol – PLC Error Code Table .A–13 GE SNPX Protocol – PLC Error Code Tables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Table of Contents Appendix A: PLC Protocol Error Codes . . A. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Rev. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .B–1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .A–9 Allen-Bradley DH485 Protocol – PLC Error Code Tables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .A–23 Mitsubishi Q / QnA Series – PLC Error Codes . .A–3 Modbus Protocols Error Code P499 Explanation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .A–27 Siemens Error Code P499 Explanation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .A–11 GE Error Code P499 Explanation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .A–6 DirectLOGIC Error Code P499 Explanation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .A–30 Siemens PPI Protocol – PLC Error Code Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .A–8 Allen-Bradley DF1 Protocol – PLC Error Code Tables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .A–7 Allen-Bradley Error Code P499 Explanation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .A–25 Omron Host Link Protocol – PLC Error Code Table . . . . . . . . . . . .A–2 C-more Micro-Graphic Panel Error Code Table . . . . . . . . . . . 07/13 v . .A–31 Appendix B: C-more Micro-Graphic Panel Runtime Errors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .A–1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .B–2 Index ® EA1-TCL-M Hardware User Manual. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2nd Ed. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .A–5 Do-more Error Code P499 Explanation . . . . . . .A–23 Omron Error Code P499 Explanation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .A–7 DirectLOGIC – K-Sequence PLC Error Code Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .B–2 Runtime Errors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .A–4 Productivity3000 Error Code P499 Explanation . . . . . . .A–14 Mitsubishi FX Protocol – PLC Error Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

.

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1–12 Step 5 – Install the Programming Software and Develop a Project .1–18 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .EA1-T4CL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1–9 Step 4 – Install C-more Color Micro-Graphic Panel . . . . . . . . . .1–17 Step 10 – Connect C-more Color Micro-Graphic Panel to PLC . . . . . . . . . . . . .1–3 Product Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1–6 Product Label Examples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1–10 Enclosure Clearances . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1–15 Step 8 – Accessing the C-more Color Micro-Graphic Panel Setup Screens . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1–14 Step 7 – Providing Power to the C-more Color Micro-Graphic Panel . . .EA1-T6CL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1–13 Step 6 – Connect C-more Color Micro-Graphic Panel to Computer .1–6 Quick Start Steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1–16 Step 9 – Choose C-more Color Micro-Graphic Panel to PLC Protocol & Cables . . . . . . . . . . .1–2 Conventions Used . CHAPTER 1 Introduction . . . . .. . . . .1–7 Step 2 – Install Optional Hardware Accessories (EA1-T6CL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1–6 Serial Number and Date Code format . . . . . . .1–5 Agency Approvals . . . . . . . . . . .GETTING STARTED In This Chapter. . . . . . . . . . . . . .1–4 Product Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1–8 Step 3 – Become Familiar with Available Communication Ports . . . . . .1–7 Step 1 – Unpack and Inspect .1–5 Part Number Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

We also encourage you to visit our web site where you can find technical and non-technical information about our products and our company. The manual shows you how to install. This user manual contains important information for personnel who will install the panels and accessories. your system up and running.M. You may also refer to the online help that is available in the C-more Micro-Graphic programming software. connectivity and setup. our user manuals will provide all the information you need to get. if for any reason you need technical assistance.com’s C-more Color Micro-Graphic panels. you may be able to get up and running with just the aide of the Quick Start Guide that is included with each panel. This manual describes AutomationDirect. Supplemental Manuals Technical Support We strive to make our manuals the best in the industry. specifications.com 1–2 ® EA1-TCL-M Hardware User Manual. If you cannot find the solution to your particular application.M. please call us at: 770–844–4200 Our technical support group will work with you to answer your questions. Eastern Time. 2nd Ed. included components and available accessories and provides you with important information for installation. 07/13 .Chapter 1: Getting Started 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 A B C D Introduction The Purpose of this Manual Thank you for purchasing from our C-more® Micro-Graphic family of products. to 6:00 P. It also helps you understand how to interface the panels to other devices in a control system. Rev. If you are familiar with industrial control type devices. http://c-moremicro. If you understand control systems making use of operating interfaces such as the C-more Micro-Graphic panels. or. We rely on your feedback to let us know if we are reaching our goal. and for the personnel who will be programming the panel. and keep. wire and use the products.automationdirect. A. They are available Monday through Friday from 9:00 A.

............. 2nd Ed. A. loss of property... Rev.1-2 Specifications ............. Key Topics for Each Chapter The beginning of each chapter will list the key topics that can be found in that chapter....1-4 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 A B C D 1–3 ® EA1-TCL-M Hardware User Manual.................................... The word WARNING: in boldface will mark the beginning of the text........ the paragraph to its immediate right will be a special note...............Chapter 1: Getting Started Conventions Used When you see the “notepad” icon in the left-hand margin........... When you see the “exclamation mark” icon in the left-hand margin. Getting Started CHAPTER 1 In This Chapter. 07/13 . the paragraph to its immediate right will be a warning. or even death (in extreme cases)......... This information could prevent injury. General Information ..................................... The word NOTE: in boldface will mark the beginning of the text.

The C-more 4” Micro-Graphic panels are powered from a 12-24 VDC class 2 power supply during operation. or can be powered in low power mode through the USB port from a PC during programming. EA1-T4CL is rated UL for use on a flat surface of Type 4X enclosure (for indoor use only).1-inch TFT LCD color 320 x 240 dot display with an LED backlight. and red LED blinking • Up to 999 screens. • Built in 15-pin serial communications port (RS-232/422/485) • Optional replaceable clear screen overlay • Built in Alarm Control setup that activates beep. A. cUL. CSA & CE agency approvals (see next page for details) • 2-year warranty from date of purchase 1–4 ® EA1-TCL-M Hardware User Manual. Other features include: • 3276 KB memory • USB Type B programming port. 2nd Ed. Portrait orientation can display 60 characters and 53 lines of static text and 40 lines by 40 characters of dynamic text. It features five user-defined function keys. limited only by memory usage • 0 to 50 °C (32 to 122 °F) operating temperature range • UL.EA1-T4CL EA1-T4CL The C-more 4” Color Micro-Graphic panel has a 4. customized alarm banner. each key with a user-defined red LED indicator. 07/13 . The panel displays up to 40 lines by 80 characters of static text and up to 30 lines by 40 characters of dynamic text with embedded variables and phrases mixed with graphics at landscape orientation. Rev. backlight flash.Chapter 1: Getting Started 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 A B C D Product Overview .

The panel displays up to 40 lines by 80 characters of static text and up to 40 lines by 40 characters of dynamic text with embedded variables and phrases mixed with graphics at landscape orientation.Chapter 1: Getting Started Product Overview . A. 2nd Ed. EA1-T6CL is rated UL for use on a flat surface of Type 1.7-inch TFT LCD color 320 x 240 dot display with an LED backlight. Rev. each key with a user-defined red LED indicator. and red LED blinking • Up to 999 screens. Portrait orientation can display 60 characters and 53 lines of static text and 40 lines by 40 characters of dynamic text. limited only by memory usage • 0 to 50 °C (32 to 122 °F) operating temperature range • UL. or can be powered in low power mode through the USB port from a PC during programming.EA1-T6CL shown in Landscape (Horizontal) mode EA1-T6CL shown in Portrait (Vertical) mode EA1-T6CL The C-more 6” Color Micro-Graphic panel has a 5. It features five user-defined function keys. cUL. 4X enclosure (for indoor use only). Other features include: • 3276 KB memory • USB Type B programming port. • Built in 15-pin serial communications port (RS-232/422/485) • 2 optional keypad bezels. 07/13 1–5 . CSA & CE agency approvals (see below for details) • 2-year warranty from date of purchase Agency Approvals UL/CUL/CE Certification Numbers Name C-more Micro-Graphic Panels & Accessories UL/CUL E157382 UL508 E157382 CSA 234884 CE EN61131-2 ISO-9000 Yes C ® UL R US 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 A B C D EA1-TCL-M Hardware User Manual. 20-button landscape and 21-button portrait mount • Optional replaceable clear screen overlay • Built in Alarm Control setup that activates beep. customized alarm banner. backlight flash. The C-more 6” Micro-Graphic panels are powered from a 12-24 VDC class 2 power supply during operation.

e. 07 = 2007) M: Month (1–9. A.g.5W Class2 Type 4X Indoor Use Only Ro Date code:**** MADE IN CHINA LISTED 7M17 IND.) B DD: Day (1–31) F: Manufacturing Site (0–9.38A Class2 Type 4X Indoor Use Only Ro Date code:**** LR234884 MADE IN CHINA LISTED 7M17 IND.g. X = Oct.e.1” Display Color: 4: 4.19W-0. 1 2 3 4 5 R MODEL : EA1-T4CL MODEL : EA1-T6CL INPUT:12-24V 0. LR234884 EA1-T4CL + serial number EA1-T6CL + serial number Serial Number = Date Code = F: Manufacturing Site (0–9. INPUT:12-24V 6.g.) R03.e.CONT. A–Z) 1–6 ® EA1-TCL-M Hardware User Manual. Rev.EQ.1“ 3 M: Monochrome 6: 5. 07 = 2007) D MM: Month (01–12 --. 07/13 .EQ. A–Z) NNN: Sequence number for the date listed (000–999) C YMMF Y: Year (0–9 --.Chapter 1: Getting Started 1 Panel Part Number Key The C-more Micro-Graphic panel part numbers consist of the following: 2 Display Size: 3: 3. 1 2 3 4 5 R Part Number Key R02.7” C: Color Series Name: Backlight Type: EA1: C-more Micro-Graphic 4 L: LED EA1-T6CL Display Type: 5 S: STN T: TFT Bezel Part Number Key 6 The optional C-more 6” Micro-Graphic keypad bezel part numbers consist of the following: Series Name: 7 EA-MG6: C-more 6” Micro-Graphic Bezel Option Module 8 EA-MG6-XXXX 9 Module Type: BZ2: 20-Key Bezel for landscape mode 10 BZ2P: 21-Key Bezel for portrait mode 11 Product Label Examples 12 13 EA1-T4CL EA1-T6CL 14 Serial Number and Date Code format A [Part Number]+[YYMDDFNNN] YY: Year (07–99 --. X = Oct.CONT.e. Z --. Y. X. 2nd Ed.g.

) Inspect all equipment for completeness. etc. A. PLC communications cable. 2nd Ed. 07/13 1–7 . immediately call the AutomationDirect® returns department @ 1-800-633-0405. If anything is missing or damaged. such as: Keypad Bezel. C-more Color Micro-Graphic Panel Shipping Carton Contents 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 A B C D ® EA1-TCL-M Hardware User Manual. programming cable. Included in the carton are the following: • C-more Color Micro-Graphic panel • DC power connector • cutout template • mounting clips • gasket • function key label inserts • Quick Start Guide Mounting Clips Function Key Label Inserts DC Power Connector Cutout Template b.) Unpack any accessories that have been ordered. Rev. c.) Unpack the C-more Color Micro-Graphic panel from its shipping carton.Chapter 1: Getting Started Quick Start Steps Step 1 – Unpack and Inspect a.

to secure panel to keypad bezel and compress the gasket between the panel and the keypad bezel. Remove Expansion Connector Protective Cover from rear of panel. Rev. Use (8) Bezel Mounting Clips. 20 Button Keypad Bezel EA-MG6-BZ2 C-more Color 6 Inch Micro-Graphic Panel 4.2 Nm]. Peel Protective Film from front of panel.15-0. Tighten screws to a torque of 21-28 oz-in [0. EA-MG-BZ2-BRK.2 Nm]. 3.Chapter 1: Getting Started Step 2 – Install Optional Hardware Accessories (EA1-T6CL) 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 A B C D 1–8 The C-more 6” Micro-Graphic panel can be mounted in an optional 20 or 21 button keypad bezel. 2. that are supplied with the panel. 07/13 .15-0. A. 2nd Ed. NOTE: Mounting clips for the panel and keypad bezels are included with the respective product. to secure keypad bezel through enclosure cutout. Use the (4) Panel Mounting Clips. EA-MG-BZ2-BRK. Tighten screws to a torque of 21-28 oz-in [0. ® EA1-TCL-M Hardware User Manual. Function Key Label Insert 1. Below is an example of a C-more 6” Micro-Graphic panel being assembled with the optional EA-MG6-BZ2 20-button Keypad Bezel.

EA1-T4CL Expansion Connector R**. 2nd Ed. 2 3 4 5 CTS (232C) RTS (232C) RXD+ (422/485) 12 TXD– (422/485) 13 Term. protocols and cables.19-0. 07/13 1–9 . the screen brightness is diminished because the panel is running in Low-Power Mode. 1 2 3 4 5 PLC 15-pin serial communications Port2 USB Type B Programming Port1 MODEL:EA1-T4CL INPUT:12-24V 0. Rev. There is a 15-pin RS-232/RS-422/RS485 port for communications to a PLC.EQ.CONT. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 A B C D ® EA1-TCL-M Hardware User Manual. NOTE: When the panel is powered through Port1 from a connected PC. 1 2 3 4 5 Signal Frame GND TXD (232C) RXD (232C) do not use Logic GND Pin 6 7 8 9 LE Signal Pin 11 Signal TXD+ (422/485) 1 8 15 1 9 MODEL:EA1-T6CL R INPUT:12-24V 6.5W Class2 Date code:**** MADE IN CHINA LISTED 4 2 7M17 IND. EA1-T4CL+094018001 Pin 1 2 3 4 5 Signal Frame GND TXD (232C) RXD (232C) do not use Logic GND Pin 6 7 8 9 LE Signal Pin Signal 11 TXD+ (422/485) 12 TXD– (422/485) 13 Term.Chapter 1: Getting Started Step 3 – Become Familiar with Available Communication Ports The C-more Color Micro-Graphic panel includes a built-in USB Type B port used to communicate with a PC during project development. Resistor 14 do not use 15 do not use CTS (232C) RTS (232C) RXD+ (422/485) 10 RXD– (422/485) RS-232/422/485 USB Type B Programming Port1 EA1-T6CL Expansion Connector PLC 15-pin serial communications Port2 Pin 3 R01.EQ.38A Class2 Date code:9048 MADE IN CHINA R 7M17 IND. Resistor 14 do not use 15 do not use EA1-T6CL + serial number 10 RXD– (422/485) RS-232/422/485 NOTE: See Chapter 2: Specifications and Chapter 6: PLC Communications for additional details on the available communication ports. A. Connect an external 12-24 VDC power source when the panel is installed in its application for full brightness.CONT.

344 [8.04”–0. A. 2nd Ed. 07/13 .8] 0.2 Nm]. Cutout dimensions for the C-more 6” Color Micro-Graphic panel 20-button landscape and 21-button portrait keypad bezel options are also shown on the next page.15-0.2” [1–5 mm].8] 0.00 +0.00 +1 92.8] R . See Chapter 2: Specifications for additional product dimensions and Chapter 3: Accessories for accessory specifications and dimensions.344 [8.8] ® EA1-TCL-M Hardware User Manual.Chapter 1: Getting Started Step 4 – Install C-more Color Micro-Graphic Panel 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 A B C D 1–10 The C-more Micro-Graphic panel can be mounted through a cutout in an enclosure by using the template that is provided with the panel. The enclosure mounting thickness range for the panels and the keypad bezels is 0.04 +1 92.344 [8.344 [8. Rev.079 [R2] CUTOUT OUTLINE 3. EA1-T4CL Panel Cutout 3. The screw torque range for the screws used on the panel mounting clips and the keypad bezel mounting clips is 21-28 oz-in [0. The keypad bezels also include a template that can be used.04 BEZEL OUTLINE CUTOUT 0.622 –0. or using the dimensions that follow.0 –0 0.622 –0.0 –0 +0.

6] R .339 –0.382 [9.Chapter 1: Getting Started EA1-T6CL Panel and Accessories Cutouts 0.811 –0.7] 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 A B C D ® EA1-TCL-M Hardware User Manual.59 [R1.118 [R3] CUTOUT OUTLINE +0. Rev.7] R0.0 –0 0.6] 0.04 0.0 –0 +0.382 [9.04 0. A.0 –0 5.260 [6.630 –0.6 +1 –0 +0.00 0. 07/13 1–11 . 2nd Ed.5] Landscape Mode (Horizontal) Portrait Mode (Vertical) BEZEL OUTLINE CUTOUT OUTLINE 9.630 –0.256 [6.382 [9.00 +1 234.00 +1 161.00 +1 122.118 [R3] R .04 4.5] EA-MG6-BZ2 Landscape (Horizontal) Keypad Bezel Cutout 0.382 [9.6 –0 +0.256 [6.382 [9.0 –0 +0.04 0.00 +0.7] 0.382 [9.260 [6.811 –0.00 +1 161.5] BEZEL OUTLINE 6.6] 4.7] 0.04 CUTOUT 0.339 –0.6] CUTOUT 0.00 +1 143.00 +1 122.382 [9.5] +0.04 0.256 [6.236 –0.7] CUTOUT R0.04 CUTOUT OUTLINE 9.5] BEZEL OUTLINE CUTOUT 5.7] EA-MG6-BZ2P Portrait (Vertical) Keypad Bezel Cutout +1 143.382 [9.256 [6.2 –0 CUTOUT OUTLINE BEZEL OUTLINE 0.260 [6.59 [R1.04 6.5] 0.7] 0.260 [6.236 –0.2 –0 +0.7] 234.

a 1. 2nd Ed.5W Class2 Date code:**** MADE IN CHINA LISTED 7M17 IND. clearance must account for the connector and the cable bend radius.2 [30.2 [30. * Additional clearance for cable bend radius typically 1/2” to 1” Enclosure 2 [50.0] Enclosure Enclosure Enclosure 1.0] 1.2 [30. Therefore.0] R01. 1 2 3 4 5 MODEL:EA1-T6CL R INPUT:12-24V 6.Chapter 1: Getting Started Enclosure Clearances 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 A B C D In all installations.0] 1. 07/13 .2” (30mm).8] 1. 8 15 1 9 EA1-T6CL + serial number 1.0] 1.2 [30.0] 1.EQ.2 [30.2 [30.0] Enclosure * 1. Rev.2 [30.2” [30mm] minimum clearance is required inside an enclosure for proper ventilation of the C-more Micro-Graphic panel.0] * Side View with EA-2CBL Side View with USB programming cable NOTE: Cable connectors are typically longer than 1.5 [38. in addition to ventilation requirements. 1–12 ® EA1-TCL-M Hardware User Manual. 1.1] 1.2 [30.CONT. A.0] Enclosure units: inches [mm] Rear View Side view Side View with EA-ADAPTR-4 EA1-T6CL with EA-MG6-BZ2(P) NOTE: Additional clearance inside the enclosure is required when connecting to the 15-pin serial communications port (Port2) unless the 90 EA-ADPTR-4 is used.2 [30.

. Windows® 7 (32 and 64 bit). on a PC: • Operating System . Windows® Vista (32 and 64 bit).. Start a Project Simulate Project Send Project to panel Allows you to check the operation of your project before downloading it to the panel. Make a New Project Select Project Location: Project: HMI Type: C:\My Documents\C-more Projects\ Browse. If you need assistance during the software installation. Enter a name for your project Select the C-more Micro-Graphic panel Select the PLC Driver Protocol Setup.automationdirect. MyProject EA1-T6CL Download your project to the connected panel.Windows® XP Home / Professional Edition Service Pack 2. When the device is properly installed and the USB programming cable connects the panel to the PLC. the port will be identified as a serial communications port with an assigned COM port number. EA-MG-PGMSW..com and follow the instructions. Windows® 2000 with Service Pack 4. or internet access to download free programming software • USB port for project transfer from software to touch panel Insert the C-more Micro-Graphic Programming Software CD-ROM into the PC’s CD-ROM drive or download the programming software from www. NOTE: The panel has an internal USB to serial converter at Port1. A. 2nd Ed.Chapter 1: Getting Started Step 5 – Install the Programming Software and Develop a Project Following are the minimum system requirements for running C-more Micro-Graphic Programming Software. Windows 8 (32 and 64 bit) • Keyboard and Mouse or compatible pointing device • Super VGA color video adapter and monitor with at least 800 x 600 pixels resolution (1024 x 768 pixels recommended) 64K color minimum • 150 MB free hard-disk space • 128 MB free RAM (512 MB recommended). PLC Protocol: DirectLogic K-Sequence 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 A B C D ® EA1-TCL-M Hardware User Manual. 512 MB free RAM (1GB recommended) for Vista • CD-ROM or DVD drive for installing software from the CD. Rev. please refer to the supplied Software Installation Guide or call the AutomationDirect Technical Support team at 770-844-4200. 07/13 1–13 ..

07/13 . maximum length 15’. A. Use a programming cable such as USB-CBL-AB6 from a USB port type A on the project development PC to the USB port type B on the C-more Color Micro-Graphic Panel as shown below. 2nd Ed.Chapter 1: Getting Started Step 6 – Connect C-more Color Micro-Graphic Panel to Computer 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 A B C D 1–14 NOTE: Install C-more Micro-Graphic Programming software before connecting the panel to the PC to ensure the panel drivers install correctly. Connect an external 12-24 VDC power source when the panel is installed in its application for full brightness. Any standard Type A to Type B USB cable can be used such as a standard USB printer cable. the screen brightness is diminished because the panel is running in Low-Power Mode. USB Programming Cable C-more Color Micro Graphic Panel User PC USB-CBL-AB6 NOTE: When the panel is powered through Port1 from a connected PC. ® EA1-TCL-M Hardware User Manual. Rev.

When powered from the PC.24 VDC (10. AutomationDirect Part No. ADC p/n AGC-75 Tightening Torque Power supply wire connection 1. the panel will operate in Low-Power mode and the screen brightness is diminished. 1). 07/13 1–15 .5W Class2 Date code:**** MADE IN CHINA LISTED 7M17 IND.CONT. The panel is powered by a 1 Amp @ 12-24 VDC class 2 power source in normal operation. PSC-24-015 or PSC-24-030.Chapter 1: Getting Started Step 7 – Providing Power to the C-more Color Micro-Graphic Panel Power can be supplied to the C-more Micro-Graphic panel in one of two different ways. 1 2 3 4 5 MODEL:EA1-T6CL R INPUT:12-24V 6.2 Nm) Required Wire Specification Supported temperature Wire Material Wire Size Over 60 °C Copper 16 .26.4 VDC) R01.7 lb-in (0.8 . 2nd Ed. The C-more Micro-Graphic panel can be powered during programming from the PC through a USB Programming Cable such as USB-CBL-AB6. 2). A.EQ. Rev. Panel Powered from a DC Power Source .22 AWG NOTE: Recommended DC power supply to power the C-more Micro Graphic Panel. 8 15 1 9 EA1-T6CL + serial number GND Equipment Ground – + Recommended DC Supply Fuse 750 mA fast acting.Wiring Diagram Supply to Panel: 1 A @ 12 . 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 A B C D ® EA1-TCL-M Hardware User Manual.

Versions [pg. Extensions [pg. 5-7] 2. Touch / Key Beep [pg. Serial Port – Loop Back Test [pg. Touch Panel Test [pg. Reset to Factory Default [pg. 5-8] ENT BAK UP DWN ENT 4. Display Test [pg. 5-6] SETUP MENU 1. 5-10] 6. Protocol [pg. 5-16] BAK 5. Setting 3. 5-6] Menu Flow Chart 1. 5-11] 8. Information [pg. 5-12] MEMORY Total: 3276800 Bytes Usage: 0 Bytes Free: 3276800 Bytes 3. press the the BAK [F1] and ENT [F5] function keys simultaneously for three (3) seconds. PLC Enquiry Test [pg. and panel functions can be tested. 5-7] 1. Exit [pg. Rotation [pg. 07/13 . 5-14] 2. Buzzer Test [pg. Rev. From the Setup Menu. 2nd Ed. Test Menu [pg. 5-9] 5. Brightness [pg. 5-6] 4. information about the panel can be obtained. Information 2. Memory [pg. Exit > > > > 3. Calibration [pg. Setting [pg. 5-16] 4. settings can be adjusted. Hourglass [pg. Clear User Memory [pg. 5-6] 2. Setup Menu [pg. 5-15] 3. 5-17] Do you want to exit from System Screen? No[F1] / Yes[F5] ® EA1-TCL-M Hardware User Manual. 5-15] 4. 5-6] 2. Test Menu 4. 5-5] 1. NOTE: See Chapter 5: System Setup Screens for details on using the setup screen settings and functions.Chapter 1: Getting Started Step 8 – Accessing the C-more Color Micro-Graphic Panel Setup Screens 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 A B C D 1–16 To access the Setup Menu of the panel’s setup screens. A. 5-13] 1. 5-10] 7.

DL405. Allen-Bradley MicroLogix 1000. CS1) Entivity Modbus RTU Siemens PPI (S7-200 CPU) Available purchased cables Cable Description Cables used with serial Port2 AutomationDirect Productivity Series.Chapter 1: Getting Started Available PLC Protocols Step 9 – Choose C-more Color Micro-Graphic Panel to PLC Protocol & Cables PLC Drivers Serial . Direct LOGIC PLC RJ-12 port. 2nd Ed. Chapter 6 includes wiring diagrams for end user construction of certain cables.port2 only AutomationDirect Productivity Series Allen-Bradley DF1 Half Duplex AutomationDirect CLICK Allen-Bradley DF1 Full Duplex AutomationDirect Do-more Allen-Bradley PLC5 DF1 AutomationDirect K-sequence Allen-Bradley DH485 AutomationDirect DirectNET GE SNPX (90/30. Direct LOGIC PLC 25-pin D-sub port. DL105. 1100. ControlLogix. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 A B C D ® EA1-TCL-M Hardware User Manual. PLC5 DH485 port (RS-232C) GE 90/30. D2-250 (250-1). Do-more. D3-350. 90/70. 90/70. DL06. Direct LOGIC PLC RJ-11 port. EA-2CBL EA-2CBL-1 EA-3CBL EA-4CBL-1 EA-4CBL-2 EA-MLOGIX-CBL EA-SLC-232-CBL EA-PLC5-232-CBL EA-DH485-CBL EA-90-30-CBL EA-MITSU-CBL EA-MITSU-CBL-1 EA-OMRON-CBL NOTE: See Chapter 6: PLC Communications for a detailed chart of PLC compatibility & cable connections. 07/13 1–17 . D3-340 (RS-232C). D3-350. Versamax Micro (Port2) 15-pin D-sub port (RS-422A) MITSUBISHI FX Series 25-pin port (RS-422A) MITSUBISHI FX Series 8-pin mini-DIN (RS-422A) OMRON Host Link (C200 Adapter. 1200. Micro 90. VersaMax Micro) AutomationDirect Modbus Mitsubishi FX AutomationDirect SOLO Mitsubishi (Q. DL06. SLC 5-01/02/03. FlexLogix DF1 port (RS-232C) Allen-Bradley PLC-5 DF1 port (RS-232C) Allen-Bradley MicroLogix. DL305 DCU and all DCM’s (RS-232C). C500) (RS-232C) Cable Part No. C500) Modicon Modbus RTU Omron FINS Serial (CJ1. QnA) AutomationDirect GS Drives Omron Host Link (C200 Adapter. DL205. Micro 90. CLICK. DL05. DL405 (RS-232C). A. Direct LOGIC DL405 PLC 15-pin D-sub port. CompactLogix. Rev. D4-450 & H2-WinPLC (RS-232C) Direct LOGIC (VGA Style) 15-pin port. D2-260 (RS-232C). 1400 & 1500 (RS-232C) Allen-Bradley SLC 5-03/04/05.

ADC p/n AGC-75 CLICK PLC Example of panel’s Port 2 connected to a CLICK PLC Port 2 PSC-24-015 Power Supply EA-2CBL serial cable C-more Color Micro-Graphic Panel Recommended DC Supply Fuse 750 mA fast acting. A. Rev. RS-422 or RS-485 communications. 2nd Ed.Chapter 1: Getting Started Step 10 – Connect C-more Color Micro-Graphic Panel to PLC 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 A B C D Connect the serial communications cable between the C-more Micro-Graphic panel and the PLC. ADC p/n AGC-75 DL-06 PLC Port 2 Example of panel’s Port 2 connected to a DL06 PLC Port 2 EA-2CBL-1 PSC-24-015 Power Supply 1–18 ® EA1-TCL-M Hardware User Manual. The panel can be connected to the PLC via the panel’s built-in 15-pin serial communications port with either RS-232. C-more Color Micro-Graphic Panel Recommended DC Supply Fuse 750 mA fast acting. 07/13 .

. .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .SPECIFICATIONS In This Chapter. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CHAPTER 2 Available Models . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2–2 EA1-T4CL Specifications . . . .2–3 EA1-T6CL Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . .2–9 Chemical Compatibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2–8 Communications Port . . .2–5 EA1-T4CL Panel Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2–10 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2–7 EA1-T6CL Panel Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

using the function keys. for indoor use only) C-more 6” Color Micro-Graphic Panel C-more 6” Color Micro-Graphic Panels Installed in Landscape and Portrait Keypad Bezels 2–2 ® EA1-TCL-M Hardware User Manual. Display supports portrait and landscape modes. IP65 (when mounted correctly. C-more Color Micro-Graphic Panels Part Number Description 4-inch C-more Micro-Graphic Touch Panel with TFT Color LCD. They have been designed to display and interchange graphical data from a PLC by viewing. 32. A. IP65 (when mounted correctly. for indoor use only) EA1-T4CL EA1-T6CL 6-inch C-more Micro-Graphic Touch Panel with TFT Color LCD.Chapter 2: Specifications 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 A B C D Available Models The C-more Color Micro-Graphic panels expand the next generation of HMI panels brought to you by AutomationDirect. 5 user-defined function keys with LED indicators. 07/13 . 32. 320 x 240 dot. See Chapter 3: Accessories for details on the available accessories for the C-more Color Micro-Graphic panels. or touching the screen. Rev. 2nd Ed.768 color display with LED backlight. Two built-in ports (USB Type-B port and 15-pin Dsub RS-232/422/485 port).768 color display with LED backlight. 5 user-defined function keys with LED indicators. NEMA 4/4X. Display supports portrait and landscape modes. NEMA 4/4X. Two built-in ports (USB Type-B port and 15-pin Dsub RS-232/422/485 port). 320 x 240 dot.

9 o’clock axis –> 35 degrees 6 o’clock axis –> 50 degrees 12 o’clock axis –> 20 degrees Specification table continued at the top of the next page. 4. RS-485 / 422). A.250” (W) x 2. 2nd Ed.357” (W) x 2.1" TFT Color LCD. graphical characters 320 (W) x 240 (H) dots (Landscape Mode) 240 (W) x 320 (H) dots (Portrait Mode) 32768 colors 320 x 240 dots LCD display (Landscape Mode). 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 A B C D ® EA1-TCL-M Hardware User Manual.Chapter 2: Specifications EA1-T4CL Specifications Specifications Description: Display: • Type • Resolution • Color • Display Brightness (Reference) • Viewing Area Size • Active Area Size • Brightness • Viewing Angle (landscape mode) Backlight: • Type • Color • User Replaceable Touch Screen: •Type • Operation • Life Features: • User Memory • Number of Screens • Beep (Internal) • Keypad Function Buttons • Keypad Function Button LEDs • Programming Port • Serial Communications LED White No Analog touch panel 82 gram force [0. Five user defined keypad function buttons.26 mm x 64.0 full speed mode 12 Mbps) 15-pin D-sub serial communications port (RS-232.8 N] maximum Minimum of 1. 07/13 2–3 . USB Type B (USB 2.54” (H) [85.000 cycles 3276 kBytes Up to 999 – limited by project memory usage Yes Five user defined function key buttons with the ability to custom label with an overlay.000. Minimum of 500.62 mm] 3.000 cycles Each function key button includes a red LED that can be user programmed. and five user defined LED's USB Bus Power (Programming) 180 nits (typ) High Power Mode 360 nits (typ) 3.92 mm] Adjusted from the panel’s built-in configuration setup menu 3.438” (H) [82.56 mm x 61. Rev.

4. ADC p/n AGC-75 8 A for 800 µs Maximum 1 ms 0 to 50 °C (32 to 122 °F) Maximum surrounding air temperature rating: 50 °C –20 to +60 °C (–4 to +140 °F) 5–95% RH (non-condensing) For use in Pollution Degree 2 environment IEC60068-2-6 (Test Fc). Dynamic Text. 8x32. 8x64. Tri-State Button Static Text.2 Nm] 14. 250 VAC.25 VDC) Supplied from a PC USB. 16x64. Indicator Light.5 mm x 110. Real Time Graphics Line Graph. 5-9 Hz: 3. 440 Mhz 10 W @ 10 cm) Impulse 1000 V @ 1 µs pulse For use on a flat surface of Type 1. and Windows fonts High Power Mode 12/24 VDC (10. Circles and Frames Fixed fonts: 4x6.99 oz.4 VDC) Supplied from an external 12-24 VDC class 2 power source 4.035” (D) [109. 15 G peak.5 mm x 110. Multi-State Bitmap. 2W No fuse required when directly connected to a PC with recommended cable.5 mm amplitude.2 – 26. 07/13 . 16x32. Static Bitmap.Chapter 2: Specifications 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 A B C D EA1-T4CL Specifications (cont’d) Specifications (cont’d) Screen Objects: • Functional Devices • Static Shapes • Displayable Fonts Electrical: USB Bus Power (Programming) • Input Voltage Range • Input Power • Power Consumption • Recommended Fuse • Max. (±10%). Graphic Indicator Light. 32x16. 10 sweep cycles per axis on each of 3 mutually perpendicular axes IEC60068-2-27 (Test Ea). Switch.362” (W) x 4. 4X enclosure (Indoor use only) CE (EN61131-2).311” (W) x 4. (145 MHz. Bitmap Button.8 mm x 51. Lines.311” (H) x 2. 16x16. UL508. Recipe Button. Function Key Configuration Object.8 mm x 51. CUL Canadian C22. 142-M95. Numeric Entry. A.5 A for 800 µs Push Button. Numeric Display. Screen Selector.362” (H) x 2.2 No.04” – 0. 6x6. 8x16.0 VDC (4. UL File E157382. CSA File 234884 2–4 ® EA1-TCL-M Hardware User Manual. Bar Graph. Lookup Text. Rev.7 mm] (Portrait Mode) 0. Inc/Dec Value. 2nd Ed.15 – 0. Screen Change Push Button. 750 mA. (425 g) 5.2” [1 – 5 mm] 21 – 28 oz-in [0. Scroll Text.75 – 5. 11 ms duration.7 mm] (Landscape Mode) 4. three shocks in each direction per axis. Analog Meter. 32x32. Indicator Button. Dynamic Bitmap. 6x8. Adjust Contrast.035” (D) [109. on 3 mutually perpendicular axes (total of 18 shocks) NEMA ICS3-304 RFI. at a rate of 1 octave/min. Rectangles.0G. 9-150 Hz: 1. sweeping.Inrush Current • Acceptable External Power Drop Duration Environmental: • Operating Temperature • Storage Temperature • Humidity • Environmental Air • Vibration • Shock • Noise Immunity • Enclosure • Agency Approvals Physical: • Dimensions • Enclosure Mounting Thickness Range • Mounting Clip Screw Torque Range • Weight 4. 32x64. Radio Button.5 W Type AGC fast acting glass fuse. 6x6B.

483” (H) [116.2 mm x 86.0 full speed mode 12 Mbps) 15-pin D-sub serial communications port (RS-232. A.000 cycles 3276 kBytes Up to 999 – limited by project memory usage Yes Five user defined function key buttons with the ability to custom label with an overlay. and five user defined LED's USB Bus Power (Programming) 45 nits (typ) High Power Mode 270 nits (typ) 4. 2nd Ed. graphical characters 320 (W) x 240 (H) dots (Landscape Mode) 240 (W) x 320 (H) dots (Portrait Mode) 32768 colors 320 x 240 dots LCD display (Landscape Mode).400” (H) [115.4 mm] 4. RS-485 / 422).2 mm x 87.8 N] maximum Minimum of 1. EA-MG6-BZ2 & EA-MG6-BZ2P 5. 07/13 2–5 . 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 A B C D ® EA1-TCL-M Hardware User Manual.Chapter 2: Specifications EA1-T6CL Specifications Specifications Description: Display: • Type • Resolution • Color • Display Brightness (Reference) • Viewing Area Size • Active Area Size • Brightness • Viewing Angle (landscape mode) Backlight: • Type • Color • User Replaceable Touch Screen: •Type • Operation • Life Features: • User Memory • Number of Screens • Beep (Internal) • Keypad Function Buttons • Keypad Function Button LEDs • Programming Port • Serial Communications • Expansion Connection LED White No Analog touch panel 82 gram force [0.4 mm] Adjusted from the panel’s built-in configuration setup menu 3.574” (W) x 3. Minimum of 500.000. Rev.535” (W) x 3.7" TFT Color LCD. Five user defined keypad function buttons. Yes – used with optional Keypad Bezels.000 cycles Each function key button includes a red LED that can be user programmed. 9 o’clock axis –> 50 degrees 6 o’clock axis –> 50 degrees 12 o’clock axis –> 45 degrees Specification table continued at the top of the next page. USB Type B (USB 2.

850” (H) x 2.4 VDC) Supplied from an external 12-24 VDC class 2 power source 6. A. Numeric Entry. Bitmap Button. CUL Canadian C22. Lookup Text.2 – 26. 15 G peak.2 No. Real Time Graphics Line Graph.130” (D) [135. 8x16. Dynamic Bitmap.331” (W) x 6.5 mm amplitude.130” (D) [174. Recipe Button. Inc/Dec Value. Indicator Light. Static Text. Rev.5 W Type AGC fast acting glass fuse. (840 g) 5.1 mm] (Portrait Mode) 0. 4.4 mm x 174. (145 MHz. 16x32. Screen Selector.4 mm x 54.25 VDC) Supplied from a PC USB. sweeping.0 VDC (4. and Windows fonts High Power Mode 12/24 VDC (10. Dynamic Text. 32x32.04” – 0. Indicator Button. three shocks in each direction per axis. (±10%). Analog Meter.Chapter 2: Specifications 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 A B C D EA1-T6CL Specifications (cont’d) Specifications (cont’d) Screen Objects: • Functional Devices • Static Shapes • Displayable Fonts Electrical: USB Bus Power (Programming) • Input Voltage Range • Input Power • Power Consumption • Recommended Fuse • Max. 8x32.2” [1 – 5 mm] 21 – 28 oz-in [0. Screen Change Push Button. Rectangles.0 mm x 135. Key Configuration Object. Graphic Indicator Light.850” (W) x 5.1 mm] (Landscape Mode) 5. UL File E157382 CSA 234884 2–6 ® EA1-TCL-M Hardware User Manual.15 – 0. Adjust Contrast. 750 mA. UL508.0G. Switch. 16x16. 2W No fuse required when directly connected to a PC with recommended cable. 10 sweep cycles per axis on each of 3 mutually perpendicular axes IEC60068-2-27 (Test Ea). 5-9 Hz: 3. 142-M95.63 oz. 32x16. Lines. 2nd Ed. 8x64. Function. 6x8.75 – 5. 440 Mhz 10 W @ 10 cm) Impulse 1000 V @ 1 µs pulse For use on a flat surface of Type 1.0 mm x 54. 9-150 Hz: 1. 4X enclosure (Indoor use only) CE (EN61131-2).5 A for 800 µs Push Button.331” (H) x 2. 16x64. 250 VAC. Static Bitmap. ADC p/n AGC-75 13 A for 800 µs Maximum 1 ms 0 to 50 °C (32 to 122 °F) Maximum surrounding air temperature rating: 50 °C –20 to +60 °C (–4 to +140 °F) 5–95% RH (non-condensing) For use in Pollution Degree 2 environment IEC60068-2-6 (Test Fc). Circles and Frames Fixed fonts: 4x6.Inrush Current • Acceptable External Power Drop Duration Environmental: • Operating Temperature • Storage Temperature • Humidity • Environmental Air • Vibration • Shock • Noise Immunity • Enclosure • Agency Approvals Physical: • Dimensions • Enclosure Mounting Thickness Range • Mounting Clip Screw Torque Range • Weight 6. 32x64. at a rate of 1 octave/min. 07/13 . Numeric Display.2 Nm] 29. 6x6. 6x6B. 11 ms duration. Bar Graph. on 3 mutually perpendicular axes (total of 18 shocks) NEMA ICS3-304 RFI.

04” .58 [91. EA1-T4CL+094018001 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 A B C D 2–7 ® EA1-TCL-M Hardware User Manual.Chapter 2: Specifications EA1-T4CL Panel Dimensions Panel Dimensions Units: Inches [mm] 3.19-0.5] 3.34 [8.58 [91.04 1.CONT. 2nd Ed.25 [51.2 Nm] R**.2” [1 .9] [31.5mm] Mounting Clip Screw Torque MOUNTING CLIP SCREW TORQUE RANGE 21 .EQ.0.36 [110.38A Class2 Date code:9048 MADE IN CHINA R 7M17 IND.31 [109.15-0. A.28 oz-in [0.7] [45.8] GASKET Units: Inches [mm] .0] 4.0] MOUNTING CLIP (4) places 2.81 1.8] Enclosure Thickness ENCLOSURE MOUNTING THICKNESS RANGE 0. 07/13 . 1 2 3 4 5 MODEL:EA1-T4CL INPUT:12-24V 0. Rev.7] 4.

13 1.15-0.689 [36. 2nd Ed.2 Nm] 2–8 ® EA1-TCL-M Hardware User Manual.295 [159.9] 6.5mm] Mounting Clip Screw Torque MOUNTING CLIP SCREW TORQUE RANGE 21 .28 oz-in [0. 07/13 .0] 4.850 [174.Chapter 2: Specifications 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 A B C D EA1-T6CL Panel Dimensions Panel Dimensions Units: Inches [mm] 2. A.04” .0.0] Units: Inches [mm] 6. Rev.3] 5.331 [135.9] [42.2” [1 .236 [6.4] Enclosure Thickness ENCLOSURE MOUNTING THICKNESS RANGE 0.1] 1.453 [54.770 [121.9] MOUNTING CLIP (4) places GASKET .

EQ. EA1-T4CL+094018001 EA1-T4CL PLC 15-pin serial communications Port2 Pin 1 2 3 4 5 Signal Frame GND TXD (232C) RXD (232C) do not use Logic GND Pin 6 7 8 9 LE CTS (232C) RTS (232C) RXD+ (422/485) Signal Pin Signal 11 TXD+ (422/485) 12 TXD– (422/485) 13 Term.Chapter 2: Specifications Communications Port Expansion Connector R**. A.EQ.38A Class2 Date code:9048 MADE IN CHINA R 7M17 IND. 8 15 1 9 EA1-T6CL + serial number PLC 15-pin serial communications Port2 Pin 1 2 Signal Frame GND TXD (232C) RXD (232C) do not use Logic GND Pin 6 7 8 9 LE CTS (232C) RTS (232C) RXD+ (422/485) Signal Pin Signal 11 TXD+ (422/485) 12 TXD– (422/485) 13 Term. Resistor 14 do not use 15 do not use EA1-T6CL 3 4 5 10 RXD– (422/485) 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 A B C D 2–9 RS-232/422/485 ® EA1-TCL-M Hardware User Manual.CONT. 1 2 3 4 5 MODEL:EA1-T4CL USB Type B Programming Port1 INPUT:12-24V 0. 07/13 . Rev.5W Class2 Date code:**** MADE IN CHINA LISTED 7M17 IND. 1 2 3 4 5 MODEL:EA1-T6CL R INPUT:12-24V 6.CONT.19-0. Resistor 14 do not use 15 do not use 10 RXD– (422/485) USB Type B Programming Port1 RS-232/422/485 Expansion Connector R01. 2nd Ed.

® EA1-TCL-M Hardware User Manual. The overlay sheet for all 3" panels. For EA1-T6CL panels with a manufacture date February 2013 and later. the panel overlay sheet from original manufacture until February 2013 is PC. Rev. 4" panels and accessory bezels is PET. The gasket is silicone rubber. For EA1-T6CL panels. the panel overlay sheet is PET. 2nd Ed. A. 07/13 . For EA1-S6ML and EA1-S6MLW panels. For EA1-S6ML and EA1S6MLW panels with a manufacture date January 2013 and later. the panel overlay sheet is PET. The structural hard plastic of the panels and accessory bezels is ABS plastic. the panel overlay sheet from original manufacture until January 2013 is PC.Chapter 2: Specifications Chemical Compatibility 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 A B C D 2–10 The C-more Micro-Graphic panels and accessory bezels are made of three materials that may be exposed to elements outside of the enclosure.

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3–2 C-more Micro-Graphic Programming Software . . .. . . . . . . .3–6 21-Button Portrait (Vertical) Keypad Bezel for 6-inch Panels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CHAPTER 3 2 Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . .3–12 Clear Screen Overlay . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3–3 20-Button Landscape (Horizontal) Keypad Bezel for 6-inch Panels . . . . . . . . . .3–9 D-SUB 15-pin 90-degree Communication Port Adapter . . . . . . . . . . .3–12 D-SUB 15-pin to Terminal Block Adapter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3–13 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .ACCESSORIES In This Chapter. . . . . . . . . .

4 arrow adjust keys. Requires USB port connection from PC to touch panel.5 m). 3–2 ® EA1-TCL-M Hardware User Manual. 4 arrow adjust keys. 2nd Ed. EA-MG-PGMSW USB-CBL-AB6 Standard USB 2. Programming cable sold separately. MENU. 20-button keypad bezel with numeric keypad for C-more 6” Micro-Graphic panels.Chapter 3: Accessories 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 A B C D Accessories Micro-Graphic Programming Software & Programming Cable Part Number Description C-more Micro-Graphic panel Windows-based configuration software. Designed for easy drop-in of the Micro-Graphic panels. and ESCAPE.8 m) cable shown as example. Designed for easy drop-in of the Micro-Graphic panels. Software Help Files included in download. Package contains 3 clear screen overlays. Downloadable version available from the Web site at no charge. Maximum cable length is 15 ft (4. Windows Vista or Windows 7. Package contains 3 clear screen overlays. (1. 07/13 .0 cable with Standard-A plug to Standard-B plug. 21-button keypad bezel with numeric keypad for C-more 6” Micro-Graphic panels. suitable for all USB devices. CLEAR and (2) ENTER buttons. CLEAR and ENTER buttons. Micro-Graphic Panel Accessory for 4-inch Panel Part Number Description EA-4-COV2 Optional clear screen overlay used to protect C-more 4” Micro-Graphic displays from minor scratches and wear. Requires Windows 2000 with Service Pack 4. Includes CD-ROM. and ESCAPE. Helps to reduce screen wear in heavy-duty applications where operators can use the keypad to enter numeric data. EA-MG6-BZ2 EA-MG6-BZ2P For Portait (Vertical) Mounted Panels. A. MENU. 6 ft. EA-6-COV2 Optional clear screen overlay used to protect C-more Micro-Graphic displays from minor scratches and wear. Micro-Graphic Panel Accessories for 6-inch Panels Part Number Description For Landscape (Horizontal) Mounted Panels. Helps to reduce screen wear in heavy-duty applications where operators can use the keypad to enter numeric data. XP Home or Professional with Service Pack 2. Rev.

Simply drag and drop the objects from the object bar (right side of screen) onto the the screen construction area. Available for free download at www. Use the built-in simulator to review your work on your PC before ever downloading your project! NOTE: Software and Firmware Version 3.com. Scrolling help window Gives you helpful information on each object Built-in project simulator • Runs your project on your PC • Test all of your screens before downloading • Time savings pays for the panel PC Requirements: Following are the minimum system requirements for running C-more Micro-Graphic Programming Software. A. Then configure your PLC tags and click on the objects you wish to use. It offers very high end features designed to reduce your configuration time.0 or later is required with model EA1-T4CL. Windows® 7 (32 and 64 bit). Thumbnail project preview pane Helps keep track of multi-screen projects.Windows® XP Home / Professional Edition Service Pack 2. Just drag and drop it on the screen. Windows® Vista (32 and 64 bit). Scrolling object selection window Lets you find the object you want fast.5 or later is required with model EA1-T6CL. Version 2. on a PC: • Operating System . 2nd Ed. 512 MB free RAM (1GB recommended) for Vista • CD-ROM or DVD drive for installing software from the CD. EA-MG-PGMSW. Windows® 2000 with Service Pack 4.automationdirect. Rev. 07/13 3–3 .Chapter 3: Accessories C-more Micro-Graphic Programming Software C-more® Micro-Graphic Programming Software is a spin-off of its powerful sibling C-more Touch Panel programming software. or internet access to download free programming software • USB port for project transfer from software to touch panel 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 A B C D ® EA1-TCL-M Hardware User Manual. Built-in user object/screen libraries Save time by re-using your custom objects and screens. Windows 8 (32 and 64 bit) • Keyboard and Mouse or compatible pointing device • Super VGA color video adapter and monitor with at least 800 x 600 pixels resolution (1024 x 768 pixels recommended) 64K color minimum • 150 MB free hard-disk space • 128 MB free RAM (512 MB recommended).

The operation of Radio Buttons only allows one button to be On at a time. The Indicator Button is a combination of a Pushbutton and an Indicator Light. just like with drawing tools. The Bar Graph can be used to create digital versions of level. The Frame object allows the user to insert a Frame to the project that can be used to Frame other objects. Unsigned Decimal. When a Line is inserted into a project. including decimal point. a window opens to allow the user to setup all available parameters for the Line object. The Tri-State Switch Object consists of a set of three Pushbuttons that allow to configure the first button to the left as a Reset that turns the other two buttons Off.BMP . or gauges that measure speed and other measurable data. The Switch object is an electronic version of a typical Switch that normally can be found on control panels. BCD. Some of the uses for Frame object include but are not limited to graphically separating objects for different operations that may appear on one screen and emphasizing pushbuttons or other objects that may require more attention by the operator.Chapter 3: Accessories 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 A B C D Micro-Graphic Programming Software (cont’d) C-more Micro-Graphic Panel Objects Object The Line object. The Indicator Light can be configured to display the status of the assigned Discrete Tag Name. Graphic The Rectangle object. The Numeric Display consists of a frame that displays a real-time numeric value according to the value of data received from an assigned Tag Name. one to read a value from and another to write a modified value to. One point is added at each refresh. The Indicator Button object is available from the Button Category of the Object List window. The Switch object can be used to activate or deactivate components assigned to a Discrete Tag Name.WMF . or indicators. pointers.JPG . The Real Time Graph object displays the value stored in up to eight PLC tags. and configure the other two buttons with individual Discrete Tag Names. This object. Up to eight address arrays can be displayed. The Bitmap Button object can be used to activate or deactivate components assigned to a Discrete Tag Name. This object has various appearances depending upon the relative value of the tags. Some of the uses for Line Objects include but are not limited to adding callouts. The Bitmap Button object offers the ability to use a Bitmap graphic to perform the functions of a Button. including decimal points. Graphic Object The Graphic Indicator Light object is a more enhanced version of the “Indicator Light Object” that allows the user to choose more detailed graphics to display the status of a tag. 07/13 . The Indicator Light can be configured to display the status of the assigned Discrete Tag Name. The Numeric Entry object is used to enter a value from your Panel to a PLC Register. The Line Graph object displays the values of up to 24 PLC address points. current. The Bar Graph object is used to monitor up to two assigned Tag Names continuously. allows the user to insert a drawing of a Circle or ellipse shape into a project. Graphics must be in one of the following formats: . Unsigned Decimal.JPEG The Indicator Light object is an electronic version of a typical Indicator Light normally found on industrial control panels. The Circle object. when selected. The line is drawn in its entirety at each refresh. C-more Micro-Graphic Panel Objects continued at top of next page. The Static Bitmap does not change state. A. User Defined Alpha Numeric Prefix and Suffix values are also supported. The Increment/Decrement Value object is used to add or subtract a value by pressing a button on the Panel. The Numeric Display supports numeric Signed Decimal. The Static Bitmap offers the ability to display a Bitmap graphic on any screen. Refer to the Dynamic Bitmap Object if you require the graphic object to change state based on a Tag Value in your PLC. The Radio Button allows a minumum of two buttons and a maximum of eight buttons. BCD. The Radio Button object is an electronic version of a set of buttons that have a similar appearance to the classic radio tuning buttons. and Floating Point data types with up to 11 digits. This object is an electronic version of a typical Indicator Light normally found on industrial control panels. The Analog Meter object is used to display the current value of a Tag Name. over a history of up to 24 points each. When this object is inserted into a project. Basically the object uses two Tags. allows the user to insert a straight line drawing into a project. and flow meters to name a few samples. 2nd Ed. just like with drawing tools. The Numeric Entry supports numeric Signed Decimal. Unsigned Decimal. The dialog box for a "Static Bitmap" object allows you to "read from disk" and select a graphic file for import. allows the user to insert a drawing of a Rectangle as well as other geometric shapes into a project. The Indicator Button can be used to activate or deactivate components assigned to a Discrete Tag Name. opens a Numeric Keypad that allows the user to enter a new value that will be written to the assigned Tag Name. When this object is inserted into a project. a window opens to allow the user to setup all available parameters for the Rectangle object. The Increment and decrement values are also user selectable. This allows users to create their own graphics and implement them within the software project. The Pushbutton object can be used to activate or deactivate components assigned to a Discrete Tag Name. Rev. a window opens to allow the user to setup all available parameters for the Circle object. User Defined Alpha Numeric Prefix and Suffix values are also supported. BCD. The Indicator Button object is an electronic version of a typical Indicator Button normally found on control panels. 3–4 ® EA1-TCL-M Hardware User Manual. The Pushbutton object is an electronic version of a typical Pushbutton normally found on control panels. and Floating Point data types with up to 11 digits. The Pushbutton object is available from the Button Category of the Object List window. including decimal points. just like with drawing tools. The Increment/Decrement Value supports numeric Signed Decimal. and Floating Point data types with up to 11 digits.

Chapter 3: Accessories Micro-Graphic Programming Software (cont’d) C-more Micro-Graphic Panel Objects Object The Dynamic Bitmap object offers the ability to make an object using two different Bitmap graphics that will display one graphic when the Tag is On and a different graphic when the Tag is Off. It can be used to create animation. The Lookup Text Object will scroll text up to 128 characters. Messages are retrieved from a Message Database which is configured by the user with text defined by the user. The Function object is used to assign the panels function key buttons to a particular action as well as assigning the control of the LED On/Off status. A. Rev. and such. Forward Screen.50 and later) displays one of up to 16 images based on the status of a tag value assigned to each image. The Adjust Contrast object is used to allow the operator to adjust the Panel Display Contrast. The Tag Name is assigned to registers in the PLC that contain set character data. Previous Screen. The current display setting value will appear on the top of the button and will change as the arrow keys are pressed. Graphic Object The Scroll Text object is available from the Text Category of the Object List window. locations. This object may be edited to various colors and sizes. however lighting may vary based on the location of each application. This button can be modified to various sizes. In these cases the operator can use this object to make adjustments. The Screen Change Pushbutton object is a pushbutton that can be configured to activate another screen in the project. When a button has been assigned as a shift button. This helps to save time by not having to create Screen change buttons for each screen. Graphic The Multi-State Bitmap (version 2. The Static Text object is used to display a Frame with a personalized Message. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 11 12 13 14 A B C D ® EA1-TCL-M Hardware User Manual. The Function Object buttons will activate when the hardware button is pressed or when the object is pressed on the screen. The Scroll Text Object has a maximum character limit of 128 characters. This object is an enhanced version of the Screen Change pushbutton in that it offers many more features and defaults with data from screens in the project. The Message can be configured to be visible (Trigger) when an associated Tag Name is On or Off. Users can configure the button to activate the Power-Up screen. It is similar to the Static Text Object. Then just push a button to load an entire set of values into the group of recipe tags. The Screen Selector object is available from the Control Category of the Object List window. The object size is restricted so that the keys will line up with the hardware function keys on the panel. This Frame and Message can be placed on any screen and any location within the screen. The object is always displayed like a sign but is configured to display only the message prompted by an assigned Tag Name. Create Recipes with up to 99 entries. 2nd Ed. 07/13 3–5 . it will scroll from right to left across the window. The Scroll Text object is an electronic version of a marquee. Recipe objects make it easy to make a large number of tag changes with the push of a single button. If the text in the object does not fit in the window. The Screen Change Pushbutton object is available from the Control Category of the Object List window. This object may be edited to various colors and sizes. The data can be stored in the PLC in ASCII format and may include information such as machine numbers. The default Display setting often works in most applications. the then F1 through F5 will become F6 through F10. The Dynamic Text Object will scroll text up to 40 characters. Use your own bitmap designs or use some of the bitmaps provided with the software that are located in the User Graphic Library. or any one of the project screens. part numbers. and multiple sets of values. This object can be placed on any screen and any location within the screen. The Dynamic Text object is used to display text that is retrieved from data stored in a Tag. The Lookup Text object is used to display a Frame with a personalized Message. The Scroll Text object does not require a Tag Name assignment. This Frame and Message can be placed on any screen and any location within the screen.

a full numeric keypad.00 0.382 [9.236 –0. The keypad includes four directional arrow cursor buttons.00 +1 143.04 CUTOUT OUTLINE +/- Four directional cursor buttons.882 [47.382 [9. along with the ENTER and CLEAR buttons.2” [1 .0.0] 9.2 Nm] GASKET Esc Menu CLR 7 8 5 2 0 6 9 3 6 3 6.59 [R1.5] 0.394 [10.15 .6 –0 +0. 2nd Ed. No panel configuration is required. The keypad is intended to be used with the numeric entry object to allow changing of a value.28 oz-in [0.7] Panel Thickness ENCLOSURE MOUNTING THICKNESS RANGE 0.7] 0.5] BEZEL OUTLINE 8 5 2 0 9 6 3 4 1 CUTOUT 5.094 [53. 07/13 .382 [9.0] MOUNTING CLIP (8) places MOUNTING CLIP (Qty:8) SCREW TORQUE RANGE 21 .9] 4 1 +/- Panel Cutout 9.8] Dimensions 10. The keypad bezel is designed for easy drop-in of a C-more 6” Micro-Graphic panel. Enter 0.4] 5. CLEAR and ENTER buttons. 3–6 ® EA1-TCL-M Hardware User Manual. and can also be used to navigate & select screen objects. The numeric buttons can be used to enter a new value. CLEAR and ENTER button.382 [9.2] 1.7] +1 234.000 [254.7] Esc Menu CLR 7 R0.0.195 [233. numeric buttons and ESC. It can also be used to access and navigate the screen selector feature. Rev. MENU. MENU. or use the cursor left and right buttons to select a digit and the cursor up and down buttons to change the value.5mm] 20-Button Keypad Bezel continued at top of next page.630 –0. and one each of an ESCAPE.588 [141. Units: Inches [mm] 2.0 –0 +0.394 [162. A.04” .Chapter 3: Accessories 20-Button Landscape (Horizontal) Keypad Bezel for 6-inch 1 Panels 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 A B C D EA-MG6-BZ2 The 20-button keypad bezel is designed to be used with the C-more 6” Micro-Graphic panels.04 Enter 0.

(±10%). 11 ms duration. CUL Canadian C22. Note: The C-more 6” Micro-Graphic panel is installed into the keypad bezel using the (4) mounting clips. EA-MG-BZ2-BRK.488” (D) [254. UL File E157382 10. EA1-S6MLW. 0 to 50 °C (32 to 122 °F) Maximum surrounding air temperature rating: 50 °C -20 to 60 °C (-4 to 140 °F) 5 to 95 % RH (non-condensing) For use in Pollution Degree 2 environment IEC60068-2-6 (Test Fc).0G.000” (W) x 6. None Minimum of 500.000 cycles (8) mounting clips. A. 142-M95. 9-150 Hz: 1. [740 g] 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 A B C D 20-Button Keypad Bezel continued at top of next page. included.5 mm amplitude.4 mm x 63. sweeping. UL508.Chapter 3: Accessories 20-Button Landscape (Horizontal) Keypad Bezel for 6-inch Panels (cont’d) 20-Button Keypad Bezel Specifications Part Number: General: • Micro-Graphic Panels Supported • Connection • Power Consumption • Keypad Button Life • Enclosure Mounting Environmental: • Operating Temperature • Storage Temperature • Humidity • Environmental air • Vibration • Shock • Noise Immunity • Enclosure • Agency Approvals Physical: • Dimensions • Weight C-more 6” Micro Graphic Panel being installed in a 20 button Keypad bezel EA-MG6-BZ2 EA-MG6-BZ2 EA1-S6ML. Rev. 440 Mhz 10 W @ 10 cm) Impulse 1000 V @ 1 µs pulse For use on a flat surface of Type 1. 15 G peak. on 3 mutually perpendicular axes (total of 18 shocks) NEMA ICS3-304 RFI.394” (H) x 2.1 oz. 2nd Ed. 07/13 3–7 . ® EA1-TCL-M Hardware User Manual.2 mm] 26.0 mm x 162. that are supplied with the panel. (145 MHz. three shocks in each direction per axis. at a rate of 1 octave/min. 4X enclosure (Indoor use only) CE (EN61131-2).2 No. EA-MG-BZ2-BRK. 10 sweep cycles per axis on each of 3 mutually perpendicular axes IEC60068-2-27 (Test Ea). 5-9 Hz: 3. EA1-T6CL Connects with expansion connector on the rear of the C-more 6” Micro-Graphic panel.

Remove Expansion Connector Protective Cover from rear of panel.2 Nm]. ® EA1-TCL-M Hardware User Manual. Tighten screws to a torque of 21-28 oz-in [0.Chapter 3: Accessories 20-Button Horizontal (Landscape) Keypad Bezel for 6-inch 1 Panels (cont’d) 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 A B C D 3–8 Panel and 20-Button Keypad Bezel Assembly 2. Peel Protective Film from front of panel. 07/13 . 3. NOTE: Mounting clips for the panel and keypad bezels are included with the respective product. Function Key Label Insert 1. that are supplied with the panel. Rev. 2nd Ed. EA-MG-BZ2-BRK.15-0. A. Use (8) Bezel Mounting Clips. Use the (4) Panel Mounting Clips.15-0. 20 Button Keypad Bezel EA-MG6-BZ2 C-more Color 6 Inch Micro-Graphic Panel 4. Tighten screws to a torque of 21-28 oz-in [0. EA-MG-BZ2-BRK. to secure panel to keypad bezel and compress the gasket between the panel and the keypad bezel.2 Nm]. to secure keypad bezel through enclosure cutout.

07/13 8 5 3–9 .00 +1 143. numeric buttons.7] CLR Enter CUTOUT Esc 7 4 1 +/- 8 5 2 0 9 6 3 Enter 9.000 [254.394 [10.15 . MENU.5] Panel Thickness 0. The keypad bezel is designed for easy drop-in of a C-more 6” Micro-Graphic panel.882 [47.9] MOUNTING CLIP (Qty: 8) SCREW TORQUE RANGE 21 . ® EA1-TCL-M Hardware User Manual. and can also be used to navigate & select screen objects.2] 0.0 –0 ENCLOSURE MOUNTING THICKNESS RANGE 0.4] 5. and one each of an ESCAPE.59 [R1. MENU.28 oz-in [0. 0.00 +1 234.588 [141.04 Menu CLR Enter Four directional cursor buttons.6 –0 +0. or use the cursor left and right buttons to select a digit and the cursor up and down buttons to change the value. 2nd Ed. EA-MG6-BZ2P Units: Inches [mm] MOUNTING CLIP (8) places 2. It can also be used to access and navigate the screen selector feature.2 Nm] Panel Cutout BEZEL OUTLINE CUTOUT OUTLINE Esc Menu 7 10.382 [9.630 –0. CLEAR and two ENTER buttons. The keypad includes four directional arrow cursor buttons.Chapter 3: Accessories 21-Button Portrait (Vertical) Keypad Bezel for 6-inch Panels The 21-button keypad bezel is designed to be used with the C-more 6” Micro-Graphic panels.0. Rev. No panel configuration is required. The numeric buttons can be used to enter a new value.382 [9.7] 0.0.394 [162. along with the ENTER and CLEAR buttons.7] R0.7] +0.236 –0.04” .5] GASKET 7 4 4 1 +/- 8 5 2 2 0 9 6 3 Enter 0.04 5.0] 9.382 [9. A.195 [233. The keypad is intended to be used with the numeric entry object to allow changing of a value.382 [9.2” [1 .8] Dimensions 6.0] 1. and ESC.5mm] 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 A B C D 21-Button Keypad Bezel continued at top of next page.094 [53. a full numeric keypad. CLEAR and two ENTER buttons.

None Minimum of 500. 10 sweep cycles per axis on each of 3 mutually perpendicular axes IEC60068-2-27 (Test Ea). 3–10 ® EA1-TCL-M Hardware User Manual. (±10%). EA-MG-BZ2-BRK. Rev. UL508.000” (H) x 2.0G. [740 g] 21-Button Keypad Bezel continued at top of next page. that are supplied with the panel. 0 to 50 °C (32 to 122 °F) Maximum surrounding air temperature rating: 50 °C -20 to 60 °C (-4 to 140 °F) 5 to 95 % RH (non-condensing) For use in Pollution Degree 2 environment IEC60068-2-6 (Test Fc). three shocks in each direction per axis. 9-150 Hz: 1. 440 Mhz 10 W @ 10 cm) Impulse 1000 V @ 1 µs pulse For use on a flat surface of Type 1.0 mm x 63. included.2 mm] 26. 11 ms duration. 142-M95. 15 G peak.Chapter 3: Accessories 21-Button Vertical (Portrait) Keypad Bezel for 6-inch Panels 1 (cont’d) 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 A B C D 21-Button Keypad Bezel Specifications Part Number: General: • Micro-Graphic Panels Supported • Connection • Power Consumption • Keypad Button Life • Enclosure Mounting Environmental: • Operating Temperature • Storage Temperature • Humidity • Environmental air • Vibration • Shock • Noise Immunity • Enclosure • Agency Approvals Physical: • Dimensions • Weight C-more 6” Micro Graphic Panel installed in a 21 button Keypad bezel EA-MG6-BZ2P EA-MG6-BZ2P EA1-S6ML. 07/13 . 4X enclosure (Indoor use only) CE (EN61131-2). EA1-T6CL Connects with expansion connector on the rear of the C-more 6” Micro-Graphic panel. Note: The C-more 6” Micro-Graphic panel is installed into the keypad bezel using the (4) mounting clips. 5-9 Hz: 3.488” (D) [162.2 No.4 mm x 254.000 cycles (8) mounting clips. CUL Canadian C22. A.5 mm amplitude. sweeping.1 oz. on 3 mutually perpendicular axes (total of 18 shocks) NEMA ICS3-304 RFI. EA-MG-BZ2-BRK. EA1-S6MLW.394” (W) x 10. UL File E157382 6. at a rate of 1 octave/min. 2nd Ed. (145 MHz.

Button Keypad Bezel EA-MG6-BZ2 NOTE: Mounting clips for the panel and keypad bezels are included with the respective product. to secure panel to keypad bezel and compress the gasket between the panel and the keypad bezel.15-0. 2.15-0. Use (8) Bezel Mounting Clips. 07/13 . 2nd Ed. to secure keypad bezel through enclosure cutout. Tighten screws to a torque of 21-28 oz-in [0. 4. Peel Protective Film from front of panel. Function Key Label Insert C-more 6-Inch Micro-Graphic Panel 21. EA-MG-BZ2-BRK. Remove Expansion Connector Protective Cover from rear of panel. Tighten screws to a torque of 21-28 oz-in [0.Chapter 3: Accessories 21-Button Vertical (Portrait) Keypad Bezel for 6-inch Panels 1 (cont’d) Panel and 21-Button Keypad Bezel Assembly 3. Rev. Use the (4) Panel Mounting Clips. 1. 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 A B C D 3–11 ® EA1-TCL-M Hardware User Manual. A. that are supplied with the panel.2 Nm].2 Nm]. EA-MG-BZ2-BRK.

2] R 0. 07/13 TERM GND RD+ RD– SD+ SD– .873 [47.13” [28.873 [47. 11 EA-COMCON-3 12 Dimensions 13 14 A B C Terminals Mounted on Mounted on D EA-T4CL EA-T6CL Units: Inches [mm] 1. LTD.6] 0.2] 1.. UL Recognized.6] 1.7] .8] Date code Country of Origin KOYO ELECTRONICS INDUSTRIES CO.15 [29.756 [44.605 [40.793 [20.0mm] GND RD+ 1. 15-pin straight through pin-out.4] .23” [5.6] Country of Origin KOYO ELECTRONICS INDUSTRIES CO. 2nd Ed. A.43” [11.6mm] 3–12 ® EA1-TCL-M Hardware User Manual. UL Recognized. D-SUB 15-pin 90-degree Communication Port Adapter EA-ADPTR-4 IOIOI – PLC 0.79” [20.7] . TERM EA-COMCON-3 RD– SD+ SD– 1.126 [28.2mm] Units: Inches [mm] Date code 1..Chapter 3: Accessories 1 The EA-ADPTR-4 adapter plugs into the 15-pin serial port on the rear of the C-more Micro panel to allow a PLC communication cable to be plugged in at a 90 degree angle to reduce panel depth requirements.856 [21.8mm] 1.815 [20.00 [25. Rev. 2 3 EA-ADPTR-4 4 Dimensions 5 6 7 Mounted on Mounted on 8 EA-T4CL EA-T6CL 9 D-SUB 15-pin to Terminal Block Adapter The EA-COMCON-3 adapter plugs into the 15-pin serial port on the rear of the C-more 10 Micro panel to allow wire terminal connections for an RS-422/RS-485/DH-485 PLC communication cable. LTD.6] R 1.

Chapter 3: Accessories Clear Screen Overlay Optional clear screen overlays are used to protect C-more Micro-Graphic displays from minor scratches and wear. 07/13 3–13 .157 [4. If your panel is not clear.197 [5.0] 3.0] EA-4-COV2 2. 2nd Ed.66 [93.197 [5.0] 0. the protective sheet may not have been removed.795 [96.85 [72. Rev.0] EA-6-COV2 0.157 [4.913 [124.4] Clear Screen Overlay Installation Step 1 Step 2 Remove the overlay from the package Step 3 Remove the paper backing from the overlay Step 4 Align the overlay with the screen and press the adhesive firmly into place Remove the protective film* *NOTE: The protective cover ships with a thin protective sheet on the face of the cover that needs to be carefully removed. Dimensions 4. Package contains three clear screen overlays.8] 3.5] 0.0] 0. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 A B C D ® EA1-TCL-M Hardware User Manual. A.

.

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .INSTALLATION & WIRING In This Chapter. . . . .4–4 Wiring Guidelines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CHAPTER 4 Safety Guidelines . . . .4–2 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4–5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4–3 Panel Cutout Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

You can order these publications directly from NEMA. If you are not familiar with control system installation practices. Some of these include: ICS 1. or your company does not have established installation guidelines. so there may be special requirements for your particular application. • NEMA — The National Electrical Manufacturers Association.Chapter 4: Installation and Wiring 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 A B C D Safety Guidelines NOTE: Products with CE marks perform their required functions safely and adhere to relevant standards as specified by CE directives provided they are used according to their intended purpose and that the instructions in this manual are adhered to. located in Washington. Check with your local Electrical Inspector or Fire Marshall office for information. Copies of the NEC Handbook can often be obtained from your local electrical equipment distributor or your local library. You should examine every aspect of the system to determine which areas are critical to operator or machine safety. Industrial Systems ICS 6. Rev. You should use external electromechanical devices. and local government requirements for the proper installation and use of your equipment. 4–2 ® EA1-TCL-M Hardware User Manual.automationdirect. The protection provided by the equipment may be impaired if this equipment is used in a manner not specified in this manual. A listing of our international affiliates is available on our Web site: http://www. Every automation application is different. you should obtain additional information from the following sources. General Standards for Industrial Control and Systems ICS 3. such as relays or limit switches.C. 2nd Ed. Enclosures for Industrial Control Systems • NEC — The National Electrical Code provides regulations concerning the installation and use of various types of electrical equipment. A. state. Automation systems can fail and may result in situations that can cause serious injury to personnel or damage to equipment. D. Make sure you follow all national. publishes many different documents that discuss standards for industrial control systems. • Local and State Agencies — many local governments and state governments have additional requirements above and beyond those described in the NEC Handbook. Plan for Safety The best way to provide a safe operating environment is to make personnel and equipment safety part of the planning process. 07/13 . Do not rely on the automation system alone to provide a safe operating environment.com WARNING: Providing a safe operating environment for personnel and equipment is your responsibility and should be your primary goal during system planning and installation. that are independent of the PLC application to provide protection for any part of the system that may cause personal injury or damage.

The keypad bezels are also provided with an appropriate cutout template for mounting convenience. securing the panel with the provided mounting clips. 2nd Ed. laying out the cutout dimensions on the surface of the control cabinet that the panel will be mounted through. 20-Button Keypad Bezel (EA-MG6-BZ2) and 21-Button Keypad Bezel (EA-MG6-BZ2P) use the same type of mounting clip (EA-MG-BZ2-BRK). then install the panel into the keypad bezel and secure with the mounting clips that are provided with the panel to seal the panel gasket. tightening the screws to the appropriate torque rating to assure the gasket is sealing correctly. Mounting Clips EA-MG-BZ2-BRK NOTE: The 4” Micro-graphic panel (EA1-T4CL). NOTE: Each C-more Micro-Graphic panel is provided with a cutout template to simplify marking the proper cutout size on the surface of the control cabinet that the panel will be mounted through. Rev. See Chapter 3: Accessories for additional details. If using a 6” panel with a Keypad Bezel. A.Chapter 4: Installation and Wiring Introduction The installation and wiring of C-more Micro-Graphic panels require selecting an appropriate location for the panel. Create a cutout in the enclosure that the assembled panel and keypad bezel will be mounted through and secure the assembly with the mounting clips that are provided with the keypad bezel. 07/13 4–3 . and finally connecting the appropriate power source to the panel. C-more 6” Micro-Graphic panels (EA1-T6CL. They are fitted to the panel by inserting two tabs into mating slots on the panel and then sliding the clip into a narrower slot to secure it in place. EA1-S6ML & EA1-S6MLW). 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 A B C D ® EA1-TCL-M Hardware User Manual. The C-more 4” and 6” Micro-Graphic panels include four mounting clips.

The screws need to be tightened to the torque rating shown in the illustration below so that the gasket is compressed to form the proper seal between the panel and cabinet surface.622 –0.0.5mm] 4–4 ® EA1-TCL-M Hardware User Manual. a 1.260 [6.344 [8.5] 6.622 –0.339 –0. The mounting clips are provided with the panel.00 +1 122.118 [R3] CUTOUT OUTLINE 3. 2nd Ed.04 0.04” .04 BEZEL OUTLINE BEZEL OUTLINE CUTOUT 0.8] +1 92. A.2” [1 .256 [6.04 CUTOUT OUTLINE 4.344 [8.0 –0 +0. There are slots on each side of the panel’s long dimension that the two tabs on each mounting clip will match.Chapter 4: Installation and Wiring 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 A B C D Panel Cutout Dimensions The C-more 4” and 6” Micro-Graphic panels are mounted into a cutout through the control cabinet and secured with four (4) mounting clips.344 [8.0 –0 +0.5] R . Next tighten the mounting clip screws to pull the rear of the panel’s bezel to the control cabinet’s mounting surface.00 0.6] 0.00 +1 161. Enclosure Mounting Thickness Ranges and Mounting Bracket Screw Torque MOUNTING CLIP SCREW TORQUE RANGE 21 .00 +1 92.256 [6.8] CUTOUT 0. 3.8] 0. Rev.15-0.6] EA1-T4CL EA1-T6CL NOTE: In all installations.0 –0 +0.811 –0.260 [6. 07/13 .344 [8.2 Nm] ENCLOSURE MOUNTING THICKNESS RANGE 0.8] 0.079 [R2] R .28 oz-in [0.04 Units: Inches [mm] 0.2” [30mm] minimum clearance is required inside an enclosure for proper ventilation of the C-more Micro-Graphic panel.2 –0 +0. The mounting clips are held in place by inserting the tabs into the “T” shaped holes (slots) and then moving the mounting clip toward the rear of the panel to keep it in place.

This publication is based on information that was available at the time it was printed.22 AWG EA1-T6CL + serial number GND Equipment Ground – + Recommended DC Supply Fuse 750 mA fast acting. Panel Powered from an external DC Power Supply – Wiring Diagram Tightening Torque Power supply wire connection Supply to Panel: 1 A @ 12 . and to verify that the equipment. 1 2 3 4 5 MODEL:EA1-T6CL R INPUT:12-24V 6.8 .Chapter 4: Installation and Wiring Wiring Guidelines WARNING: To minimize the risk of potential safety problems. so we reserve the right to make changes to the products and/or publications at any time without notice and without obligation. NOTE: When the panel is powered through Port1 from a connected PC. 8 15 1 9 Required Wire Specification Supported temperature Wire Material Wire Size Over 60 °C Copper 16 .CONT.) During operation.5W Class2 Date code:**** MADE IN CHINA LISTED 7M17 IND. Recommended power supplies are AutomationDirect part number PSC-12-015 or PSC-24-030. the screen brightness is diminished because the panel is running in Low-Power Mode.2 Nm) R01. When powered from the PC. A. 2. or if you need additional information. the panel is powered by a minimum 1 Amp 12 . Connect an external 12-24 VDC power source when the panel is installed in its application for full brightness 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 A B C D ® EA1-TCL-M Hardware User Manual.com® we constantly strive to improve our products and services. We do not guarantee the products described in this publication are suitable for your particular application. Providing Power to the C-more Color Micro-Graphic Panel 1. This publication may also discuss features that may not be available in certain revisions of the product. and operation are in compliance with the latest revision of these codes.7 lb-in (0. These codes vary from area to area and it is your responsibility to determine which codes should be followed. At Automationdirect.24 VDC class 2 power source. the panel will operate in Low-Power mode and the screen brightness is diminished. AutomationDirect Part No.24 VDC (10. 07/13 4–5 . 2nd Ed.26. installation.EQ. Rev.4 VDC) 1. nor do we assume any responsibility for your product design. PSC-12-015 or PSC-24-030.) The C-more Color Micro-Graphic panel can be powered during programming from the PC through a USB Programming Cable such as USB-CBL-AB6. Equipment damage or serious injury to personnel can result from the failure to follow all applicable codes and standards. If you have any questions concerning the installation or operation of this equipment. ADC p/n AGC-75 NOTE: Recommended DC power supply. or operation. please call us at 1-800-633-0405 or 770-844-4200. you should follow all applicable local and national codes that regulate the installation and operation of your equipment. installation.

.

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CHAPTER 5 Introduction . .5–5 Information Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .SYSTEM SETUP SCREENS In This Chapter. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5–10 Hourglass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5–14 PLC Enquiry Test . .5–2 Accessing the System Setup Screens . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5–11 Rotation .5–4 Setup Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5–16 Exit . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5–6 Setting Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5–13 Serial Port2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5–15 Touch Panel Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5–9 Clear User Memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5–17 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5–3 System Setup Screens Flowchart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5–12 Test Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5–10 Reset to Factory Default . . . . . . . . . . . .5–15 Buzzer Test . . . . . . . . .5–8 Calibration . . . . . . . . . .5–7 Brightness . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5–16 Display Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5–7 Touch/Key Beep . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Loop Back Test . . . . . . . . . . . .

the protocol being used by the panel. test various functions of the panel. clearing the user memory. make adjustments. calibrating the touch panel. 5–2 ® EA1-TCL-M Hardware User Manual. to test operation of the panel’s beeper and to test the touch panel surface. to test communications with the PLC. Refer to the serial port loop back test section of this chapter for details on loop back connector wiring. if an optional keypad bezel is installed and version information for the firmware and boot loader. Setting This is the area for adjusting the brightness of the display. and reset all values and conditions back to the original factory defaults. resetting all of the settings back to the factory defaults. and setting the loading screen hourglass icon delay time or disabling the display of the hourglass icon. • Horizontal display area orientation Test Menu The test menu includes options to initiate communication tests of the serial port. A. or test the panel. 2nd Ed. clear memory. adjust features. detailed information about the panel’s available memory and usage. The following is presented to give the user a detailed step by step look at: • How to access the System Setup Screens • What adjustments and features are available • When and why the feature may need to be adjusted or used • How to adjust and/or interrupt the features The System Setup Screens are split into three categories to make it easy for the user to view information. The Setting factory default values are: • Brightness value of 10 • The internal audible beeper enabled • Forced touch panel calibration • User program cleared from memory • Hourglass icon delay of 350 ms. Rev. 07/13 .Chapter 5: System Setup Screens 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 A B C D Introduction The C-more® Micro-Graphic panels include a series of built-in System Setup Screens that allow the user to view detailed information about the panel. The three Setup Menu selections are: Information Here you will find the panel model number. enabling or disabling the internal beeper.

Test Menu 4. Test Menu 4. Information 2. SETUP MENU BAK SETUP MENU BAK SETUP MENU SETUP MENU 1. Setting 3. The System Setup Screens’ Setup Menu will be displayed as shown at the bottom of this page. Press both the F1 and F5 function keys simultaneously for 3 seconds to bring up the System Setup Screens’ Setup Menu. Rev. Exit > > > ENT UP ENT DWN ENT BAK UP DWN ENT DWN ENT ENT ENT BAK UP DWN ENT EA1-T6CL Portrait Mode EA1-T6CL Landscape Mode EA1-T4CL Portrait Mode EA1-T4CL Landscape Mode 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 A B C D ® EA1-TCL-M Hardware User Manual. Test Menu 4. Test Menu 4. 07/13 5–3 . Setting 3. A. Setting 3. Information 2. Setting 3.Chapter 5: System Setup Screens Accessing the System Setup Screens To access the Setup Menu of the panel System Setup Screens. Exit > > > > 1. press the panel’s BAK [F1] and ENT [F5] function keys simultaneously for three (3) seconds as shown below. Information 2. 2nd Ed. Exit > > > > 1. Information 2. Exit > > > UP 1.

5-6] 3. 5-8] 4. 5-7] 2. Memory [pg. 5-11] 8. 5-9] 5. 5-6] 2. PLC Enquiry Test [pg. 5-7] 1. 2nd Ed. 5-10] 6. 5-15] 3. 5-10] 7. Information [pg. Serial Port – Loop Back Test [pg. Rotation [pg. Rev. 5-5] 1. Hourglass [pg. 5-16] 5. 5-13] 1. Touch Panel Test [pg. 5-12] 3. 5-15] 4. 5-6] 2. Setting [pg. Clear User Memory [pg. Touch / Key Beep [pg. Extensions [pg. 07/13 . Buzzer Test [pg. Display Test [pg. Exit [pg. Brightness [pg. A. 5-6] 1. 5-17] Do you want to exit from System Screen? No[F1] / Yes[F5] 5–4 ® EA1-TCL-M Hardware User Manual.Chapter 5: System Setup Screens 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 A B C D System Setup Screens Flowchart Setup Menu [pg. 5-6] 4. Reset to Factory Default [pg. Test Menu [pg. Protocol [pg. 5-16] 4. Calibration [pg. Versions [pg. 5-14] 2.

Exit > > > > To navigate the different selections under the Setup Menu. Setting 3. Information 2. Exit > > > > NXT UP DWN Pressing ENT [F5] with Setting highlighted will take you to the Setting menu screen. See page 5-15. ENT ENT 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 A B C D ® EA1-TCL-M Hardware User Manual. See page 5-18. UP DWN ENT ENT BAK SETUP MENU 1. DWN [F4] to cursor down. Setting 3. 2nd Ed. Pressing ENT [F5] with Information highlighted will take you to the Information menu screen. See page 5-7. Test Menu 4. Exit > > > > NXT UP DWN Pressing ENT [F5] with Test Menu highlighted will take you to the Test Menu screen. ENT ENT BAK SETUP MENU 1. Test Menu 4. UP [F3] to cursor up. Setting 3. ENT ENT BAK SETUP MENU 1. Setting 3. Test Menu 4. A. Exit > > > > NXT UP DWN Pressing ENT [F5] with Exit highlighted will allow the used to decided whether to Exit or not Exit the System Setup Screens. Information 2. Information 2. use the function keys BAK [F1] to return to the project screen or previous screen. and ENT [F5] to enter a selection.Chapter 5: System Setup Screens Setup Menu BAK SETUP MENU 1. Test Menu 4. Information 2. Rev. See page 5-6. 07/13 5–5 .

1. Versions > > > > NXT UP DWN ENT ENT Pressing ENT [F5] with Extensions highlighted will show if an optional keypad bezel is installed on the panel. BAK MEMORY Total: 3276800 Bytes Usage: 0 Bytes Free: 3276800 Bytes BAK INFORMATION 1. Extensions 4.5 or later is required with model EA1-T6CL. 2nd Ed. Memory 2. Extensions 4. The example here shows the EA-MG6-BZ2. BAK EXTENSIONS Detected Devices : BZ2 BAK INFORMATION 1.0. Protocol 3. 07/13 . 5–6 ® EA1-TCL-M Hardware User Manual. Memory 2.automationdirect. Versions > > > > NXT UP DWN ENT ENT Pressing ENT [F5] with Memory highlighted will show the total memory available.0 ––––– ENT ENT NOTE: Software and Firmware Version 3. Memory 2. Memory 2. memory usage and free memory available for the project. A. Extensions 4. Versions > > > > NXT UP DWN ENT ENT Pressing ENT [F5] with Protocol highlighted will show the PLC Protocol that has been assigned to the panel and the protocol version.* BAK VERSIONS Model: Firmware : Boot Loader : EA1-T6CL 3.00.com. BAK PROTOCOL Protocol Type : K-Sequence Version : 2. Versions > > > > NXT UP DWN Pressing ENT [F5] with Versions highlighted will show the panel model. Extensions 4. Protocol 3. Protocol 3. Available for free download at www.0. firmware and boot loader versions. Version 2.0 or later is required with model EA1-T4CL. Protocol 3.2 BAK INFORMATION 1.Chapter 5: System Setup Screens 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 A B C D Information Menu BAK INFORMATION 1. Rev.

Chapter 5: System Setup Screens

Setting Menu
BAK

SETTING
1. Brightness > 2. Touch/Key Beep > 3. Calibration > 4. Clear User Memory 5. Reset to Factory Def 6. Hourglass > 7. Rotation >
ENT

NXT UP DWN ENT

Use the UP [F3] and DWN [F4] function keys to scroll through the list of settings. The BAK [F1] function key will return you to the previous screen. Use the ENT [F5] function key to make your selection once you have the setting highlighted. The Setting screen includes the following: Brightness - page 5-7 Touch/Key Beep – page 5-8 Calibration – page 5-9 Clear User Memory – page 5-10 Reset to Factory Default – page 5-10 Hourglass – page 5-11 Rotation – page 5-12

Setting – Brightness
BAK

SETTING
1. Brightness > 2. Touch/Key Beep > 3. Calibration > 4. Clear User Memory 5. Reset to Factory Def 6. Hourglass > 7. Rotation >
ENT

NXT UP DWN ENT

With Brightness highlighted, press ENT [F5] to bring up the screen showing the current value. The default is 10. The contrast can be adjusted between 1 and 16, with 1 being the least contrast and 16 being the greatest.

BAK

Brightness
Current Value : 10

UP DWN
ENT

APL

NOTE: When the panel is powered through Port1 from a connected PC, the screen brightness is diminished because the panel is running in Low-Power Mode. Connect an external 12-24 VDC power source when the panel is installed in its application for full brightness.

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 A B C D

®

EA1-TCL-M Hardware User Manual, 2nd Ed. Rev. A, 07/13

5–7

Chapter 5: System Setup Screens

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 A B C D

Setting – Touch/Key Beep
BAK

SETTING
1. Brightness > 2. Touch/Key Beep > 3. Calibration > 4. Clear User Memory 5. Reset to Factory Def 6. Hourglass > 7. Rotation >
ENT

NXT UP DWN ENT

With Touch/Key Beep highlighted, press ENT [F5] to show the current value for the internal beeper. The default is ON. The UP [F3] and DWN [F4] function keys can be used to toggle between the ON and OFF state for the beeper (enable or disable). Use the APL [F5] function key to apply the selection.

BAK

TOUCH KEY / BEEP
Current Value: Enable

UP DWN
ENT

APL

NOTE: Loading a project to the panel will override whatever selection is chosen for the beeper from the System Setup Screens’ Beep on/off selection screen. The Beep on/off choice can be changed through the System Setup Screens after a project is loaded.

5–8

®

EA1-TCL-M Hardware User Manual, 2nd Ed. Rev. A, 07/13

Chapter 5: System Setup Screens

Setting – Calibration
BAK

SETTING
1. Brightness > 2. Touch/Key Beep > 3. Calibration > 4. Clear User Memory 5. Reset to Factory Def 6. Hourglass > 7. Rotation >
ENT

NXT UP DWN ENT

With Calibration highlighted, press ENT [F5] to bring up the first calibration screen as shown on the right. Touch the “cross” in the upper left corner as accurately as you can. When the screen is touched, the cross will move to each corner and finally to the center of the screen. If the touch points are within the built-in calibration tolerance, the final screen will allow you to either save and quit from the calibration procedure, or allow you to retry. If the points that were touched are not within the calibration tolerance, you will be returned to the first calibration screen and will need to start over.

Press Cross Mark Panel will not Communicate in this mode. Press F1 to Quit

Press Cross Mark Panel will not Communicate in this mode. Press F1 to Quit

Press Cross Mark

Press F1 to Quit

F5 to Save & Quit F1 to Retry

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 A B C D 5–9

®

EA1-TCL-M Hardware User Manual, 2nd Ed. Rev. A, 07/13

Touch/Key Beep > 3. Press [F5] to restore all settings 12 to factory defaults and clear user 13 memory. 07/13 . Rev. 14 Factory default values can also be reset by pressing F2 and F4 while cycling power to the panel.Are Touch/Key Beep > you sure you 4. Reset to Factory Def 7. Reset to Factory Def 7. press 2 ENT [F5]. C • Horizontal orientation NOTE: User memory is cleared when factory defaults are reset. Hourglass > 7. Brightness > 2. Reset to Factory Def 6. Rotation > SETTING NXT UP DWN ENT 1. Brightness > 2. Press [F1] to cancel.Are Touch/Key Beep > you sure you 4.No[F1] Hourglass > / Yes[F5] 8.want Calibration > to clear 5. Rotation > ENT ENT YES DWN BAK NO SETTING SETTING 1.No[F1] Hourglass > / Yes[F5] 8.Chapter 5: System Setup Screens With Clear User 1 Memory highlighted. 6 7 8 9 Default 10 Setting – Reset to FactoryWith Reset to Factory Default 11 highlighted. Use the C-more Micro-Graphic D programming software to read the program from the panel iand save a backup copy. Brightness > 2. Calibration > 4. 2nd Ed. Clear User Memory 5. Touch/Key Beep > 3. A.memory? Clear User Memory 6. Hourglass > 7. Rotation > NXT UP DWN ENT 1. Rotation > ENT ENT YES DWN 5–10 ® EA1-TCL-M Hardware User Manual. Brightness > 2. You will be given the choice 3 to either proceed with clearing the user memory by 4 pressing [F5] for YES or allowed to 5 cancel by pressing [F1] for NO. Reset to Factory Def 6. The Factory Default values are: A • Brightness value of 10 • The internal audible beeper enabled • Forced touch panel calibration B • User program cleared from memory • Hourglass icon delay of 350 ms. Calibration > 4. press ENT [F5].memory? Clear User Memory 6. BAK NO Setting – Clear User Memory SETTING 1.want Calibration > to clear 5. Clear User Memory 5.

Hourglass > 7. The hourglass icon can also be disabled from being displayed. Clear User Memory 5. The UP [F3] and DWN [F4] function keys scroll through the selections. Reset to Factory Def 6. With Hourglass highlighted. 07/13 . Calibration > 4.Chapter 5: System Setup Screens Setting – Hourglass BAK SETTING 1. Explanation: An hourglass icon is displayed on the panel anytime a new screen is being loaded until communication is established with the new screen. Rotation > ENT NXT UP DWN ENT The Hourglass selection listed under the Setting menu can be used to either disable the display of the hourglass icon or set the amount of delay time (0 ms to 1000 ms) desired before it is displayed. If communication is established before the delay has timed out. Touch/Key Beep > 3. 2nd Ed. no hourglass will be displayed. Rev. Use the APL [F5] function key to apply the selection. BAK HOURGLASS Delay/Disable ICON: 350ms UP DWN ENT APL BAK HOURGLASS Delay/Disable ICON: Disable UP DWN ENT APL Hourglass Icon 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 A B C D 5–11 ® EA1-TCL-M Hardware User Manual. Brightness > 2. press ENT [F5]. A.

07/13 . BAK ROTATION Portrait Mode: off UP DWN ENT APL Note: Loading a project to the panel will override the orientation choosen from the System Setup Screens’ Rotation selection screen. Reset to Factory Def 6. Touch/Key Beep > 3. press ENT [F5] to show the current orientation.Chapter 5: System Setup Screens 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 A B C D Setting – Rotation BAK SETTING 1. The selected orientation is displayed only when in the System Setup Screens. Press UP [F3] and DWN [F4] to toggle between the portrait (vertical) and landscape (horizontal) orientation. Rev. 2nd Ed. 5–12 ® EA1-TCL-M Hardware User Manual. Brightness > 2. Calibration > 4. Use the APL [F5] function button to apply the selection. Hourglass > 7. A. Clear User Memory 5. Rotation > ENT NXT UP DWN ENT With Rotation highlighted.

Chapter 5: System Setup Screens Test Menu BAK TEST MENU 1. 2nd Ed. The BAK [F1] function key will return you to the previous screen.Loop Back Test – page 5-14 PLC Enquiry Test – page 5-15 Buzzer Test – page 5-15 Touch Panel Test – page 5-16 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 A B C D ® EA1-TCL-M Hardware User Manual. Buzzer Test 4. Rev. Display Test UP DWN ENT ENT Use the UP [F3] and DWN [F4] function keys to scroll through the list of tests. PLC Enquiry Test 3. Use the ENT [F5] function key to make your selection once you have the test highlighted. Serial Port . 07/13 5–13 . Serial Port . A.Loop Back 2. Touch Panel Test 5.

Counts Err. Counts Err. Buzzer Test 4. Touch Panel Test 5. Serial Port . Counts RTS/CTS 124 124 0 pass UP DWN ESC ENT BAK LOOP BACK TEST Serial Port : Bytes Sent Rcv.Loop Back 2. 2nd Ed. 07/13 .Chapter 5: System Setup Screens Test Menu – Serial Port . The test will continue until the BAK [F1] key is pressed. Rev. PLC Enquiry Test Use Loop-Back 3. either connect the RS-232 loop back connector or the RS-422/485 loop backconnector. depending on which type of communications connection is being used. Serial Port . A. If the test is passing.Loop Back 2. PLC Enquiry Test 3. If the serial port is not working. Buzzer Test Connector and 4. BAK TEST MENU 1. Display Test UP DWN ENT ENT BAK LOOP BACK TEST Serial Port : Bytes Sent Rcv. and press ENT [F5] to start the test.Loop Back Test BAK TEST MENU 1. press ENT [F5] to bring up the screen shown to the right. At this point. Display Test UP DWN ENT ENT 5 RS-232 Loop-back Connector User Constructed 15-pin D-sub (male) 2 TXD 15 3 7 8 RXD CTS RTS 1 Wiring Diagram RS-422/485 Loop-back Connector User Constructed 7 CTS 15-pin D-sub (male) 8 RTS 9 11 10 12 RXD+ TXD+ RXD– TXD– 1 15 With Serial Port Loop Back Test highlighted. Counts RTS/CTS 124 0 124 fail UP DWN ESC ENT Wiring Diagram 5–14 ® EA1-TCL-M Hardware User Manual. Touch Panel Test Press ENT 5. The RTS/CTS signals will also show either pass or fail as shown to the right. then the Error Counts will equal the Bytes Sent. the Receive Counts will equal the Bytes Sent.

Serial Port . Four data tests will be performed and indicated as either Test Passed or Test Failed as shown on this page.Loop Back 2. press ENT [F5] to run the test on the internal audible beeper. Display Test UP DWN ENT ENT Test Menu – Buzzer Test BAK TEST MENU 1. The beeper function can not be turned on or off from this screen. Touch Panel Test 5. The BAK [F1] key can be pressed to cancel the test and/or returned to the previous screen. PLC Enquiry Test 3. PLC Enquiry Test 3. Connect an external 12-24 VDC power source when the panel is installed in its application for full brightness. Rev. If the PLC is connected to the panel. Buzzer Test 4. 07/13 5–15 . Buzzer Test 4. the screen brightness is diminished because the panel is running in Low-Power Mode. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 A B C D ® EA1-TCL-M Hardware User Manual. Display Test With Buzzer Test selection highlighted. refer to the Setting menu. BAK TEST MENU 1. A.Chapter 5: System Setup Screens Test Menu – PLC Enquiry Test BAK TEST MENU 1. UP DWN ENT ENT NOTE: The beeper tone is not selectable.Loop Back 2. NOTE: When the panel is powered through Port1 from a connected PC. The beeper will sequence up the scale through eight notes and then start over. The BAK [F1] key can be pressed to cancel the test. press ENT [F5] to start the test. Touch Panel Test 5. 2nd Ed. press ENT [F5] to bring up the screen shown to the right. Display Test UP DWN ENT ENT BAK PLC ENQUIRY TEST DirectLogic K-Sequence Data1 : Test Passed Data2 : Test Passed Data3 : Test Passed Data4 : Test Passed ESC With PLC Enquiry Test highlighted. Touch Panel Test 5. Serial Port . Serial Port . PLC Enquiry Test Connect Panel to 3. Buzzer Test PLC 4.Loop Back 2.

press ENT [F5] to bring up the 2 screen shown to the right. Display Test UP Press Key to Quit DWN ENT ENT Press Key to Quit BAK TEST MENU 1. Press any key [F1 to F5] to return 14 to the Test Menu. Touch Panel Test 5. Buzzer Test 4.Display TestWith Display Test highlighted. 07/13 .Loop Back 2. the 5 screen will blacken at the area touched. 12 Use this test to identify any area that is 13 displaying colors incorrectly. Buzzer Test 4. A B C D BAK Test Menu . After a few 11 seconds a scrolling RGB color test will begin. A.Touch Panel Test TEST MENU 1. 2nd Ed. Serial Port1 . Serial Port1 . Rev.Chapter 5: System Setup Screens With Touch Panel Test 1 highlighted. press ENT 10 [F5] to bring up the screen shown to the right. Touch any area of 3 the screen to visualize the active area of the touch screen. 7 Press any key [F1 to F5] to return to the Test Menu. Use this test to identify any 6 area that is not responding properly. 8 9 Test Menu .Loop Back 2. PLC Enquiry Test 3. Touch Panel Test 5. Display Test UP DWN ENT Red Green Blue ENT Press Key to Quit 5–16 ® EA1-TCL-M Hardware User Manual. If the 4 touch panel area is working properly. PLC Enquiry Test 3.

Exit > No[F1] / Yes[F5] ENT UP DWN ENT With Exit highlighted. exit Setting > from System 3. You will be returned to the project screen if answering YES. then a NO USER PROGRAM message as shown to the left will be displayed. Do Information you want to > 2. Do Information you want to > 2. Screen? Test Menu > NO USER PROGRAM 4. If there is no user program loaded into the panel. 2nd Ed. Rev. exit Setting > from System 3. press ENT [F5] to bring up the screen shown to the left.Chapter 5: System Setup Screens Exit BAK SETUP MENU 1. BAK SETUP MENU 1. Screen? Test Menu > 4. Exit > No[F1] / Yes[F5] ENT UP DWN ENT 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 A B C D ® EA1-TCL-M Hardware User Manual. A. You will be given the choice to either proceed with exiting the System Setup Screens by pressing [F5] for YES or allowed to cancel by pressing [F1] for NO. 07/13 5–17 .

.

. . .6–5 GE. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . .6–5 AutomationDirect Controllers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6–5 Compatibility and Connection Charts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6–16 User Constructed Cables – Wiring Diagrams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6–24 RS-422A Multi-Drop Wiring Diagram Example . . . . . . . . . .6–2 C-more Micro-Graphic Communication Ports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Mitsubishi. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CHAPTER 6 Introduction . . . . . . .6–5 RS-422A/RS-485A Communications . . . . . .6–2 Available PLC Protocols . . . . . . . . . . Omron. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .PLC COMMUNICATIONS In This Chapter. . . .6–14 Cables from AutomationDirect – Wiring Diagrams . . .6–5 Cables from AutomationDirect . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6–34 RS-485A Multi-Drop Wiring Diagram Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6–4 DirectLOGIC PLCs Password Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6–5 Allen-Bradley . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Modicon and Siemens . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6–36 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

The panel also has the ability to communicate with Allen-Bradley PLCs that support the AllenBradley DF1 and DH485 protocols. H2-WINPLC phone jack: RJ12 .Chapter 6: PLC Communications 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 A B C D Introduction The C-more® Color Micro-Graphic panels are capable of communicating with AutomationDirect Productivity Series. CLICK. 07/13 . DL450. The C-more® Micro-Graphic panel communicates using the following cables. DL105. Omron. the screen brightness is diminished because the panel is running in Low-Power Mode. CLICK. ControlLogix.15 pin D-sub. and any PLC using AB AIC device: 15-pin Dshell . • EA-MLOGIX-CBL – connects to AB MicroLogix 1000. Use Port2 with the following cables to connect the panel to a majority of Allen-Bradley PLCs. NOTE: Refer to the Compatability and Connection Charts beginning on page 6-7 for a listing of PLC connections for the C-more Micro-Graphic panel. SOLO.connects to D2-250.RJ45 8-pin The PLC Compatibility and Connection Chart tables on the following pages list the various PLCs and protocols that can be configured.connects to Productivity Series. DL06 VGA connector: 15-pin HD . DL350. FlexLogix: 15-pin D-sub . A.25-pin Dshell • EA-DH485-CBL – connects to AB MicroLogix. CompactLogix. GS Drives and the entire DirectLOGIC family of PLCs. • EA-2CBL-1 . RS422 or RS485 on Port2. Rev. /04.15 pin D-sub. 6–2 ® EA1-TCL-M Hardware User Manual. SLC500. DL05.8-pin DIN • EA-SLC-232-CBL – connects to AB SLC 5/03. Do-more. 1200 1400 & 1500: 15-pin D-sub . The rest of this chapter shows the pin to pin connections of available cables plus wiring diagrams to construct cables.9-pin Dshell female • EA-PLC5-232-CBL – connects to AB PLC5: 15-pin Dshell . D2-260. D250-1. Do-more. Connect an external 12-24 VDC power source when the panel is installed in its application for full brightness. /05. 2nd Ed. The panel is capable of communicating using RS232. Mitsubishi. NOTE: When the panel is powered through Port1 from a connected PC. Modicon and Siemens. DL205. 1100. Other third party PLCs include GE. • EA-2CBL .

Chapter 6: PLC Communications Introduction (cont’d) Available PLC Protocols PLC Drivers Serial .port2 only AutomationDirect Productivity Series AutomationDirect CLICK AutomationDirect Do-more AutomationDirect K-sequence AutomationDirect DirectNET AutomationDirect Modbus AutomationDirect SOLO AutomationDirect GS Drives Modicon Modbus RTU Entivity Modbus RTU Allen-Bradley DF1 Full Duplex Allen-Bradley DF1 Half Duplex Allen-Bradley PLC5 DF1 Allen-Bradley DH485 GE SNPX (90/30. QnA Omron Host Link (C200 Adapter. please contact our technical support group at 770-844-4200. C500) Omron FINS Serial (CJ1. See the example wiring diagrams at the end of this chapter for details. A. Rev. If you have difficulty determining whether the particular PLC and/or protocol you are using will work with C-more Micro-Graphic panels. 90/70. 2nd Ed. VersaMax Micro) Mitsubishi FX Mitsubishi Q. 07/13 6–3 . Micro 90. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 A B C D ® EA1-TCL-M Hardware User Manual. CS1) Siemens PPI (S7-200 CPU) The panel can also be connected to more than one PLC by using RS-422 or RS-485 wired in a multi-drop configuration.

07/13 . EA1-T4CL+094018001 R01.19-0. 8 15 1 9 EA1-T6CL + serial number PLC 15-pin serial communications Port2 Pin 1 2 3 4 5 Signal Frame GND TXD (232C) RXD (232C) do not use Logic GND Pin 6 7 8 9 LE CTS (232C) RTS (232C) RXD+ (422/485) Signal Pin Signal Pin 1 2 3 4 5 PLC 15-pin serial communications Port2 Signal Frame GND TXD (232C) RXD (232C) do not use Logic GND Pin 6 7 8 9 LE CTS (232C) RTS (232C) RXD+ (422/485) Signal Pin Signal 11 TXD+ (422/485) 12 TXD– (422/485) 13 Term.CONT.5W Class2 Date code:**** MADE IN CHINA LISTED 7M17 IND. Resistor 14 do not use 15 do not use 11 TXD+ (422/485) 12 TXD– (422/485) 13 Term. Resistor 14 do not use 15 do not use 10 RXD– (422/485) 10 RXD– (422/485) RS-232/422/485 EA1-T4CL EA1-T6CL RS-232/422/485 6–4 ® EA1-TCL-M Hardware User Manual. 2nd Ed.EQ. 1 2 3 4 5 Expansion Connector USB Type B Programming Port1 MODEL:EA1-T4CL INPUT:12-24V 0. ADC p/n AGC-75 CLICK PLC Port 2 PSC-24-015 Power Supply EA-2CBL serial cable USB Type B Programming Port1 Expansion Connector R**. 1 2 3 4 5 MODEL:EA1-T6CL R INPUT:12-24V 6.EQ. Rev. A.38A Class2 Date code:9048 MADE IN CHINA R 7M17 IND.CONT.Chapter 6: PLC Communications 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 A B C D C-more Micro-Graphic Communication Ports Example of panel connected to a CLICK PLC C-more Color Micro-Graphic Panel Recommended DC Supply Fuse 750 mA fast acting.

These PLCs are listed in a chart and various wiring diagrams are shown to allow connectivity. 07/13 6–5 . The user constructed cable diagrams start on page 6-24. Omron. Rev. 1 Amp @ 12-24 VDC external power source is required. CLICK. RS-422A/RS-485A Communications When using the RS-422A/RS-485A communications capabilities of the C-more Micro-Graphic Serial Port (Port 2). A. Do-more. AutomationDirect Controllers AutomationDirect Productivity Series. jumper pin 13 (termination resistor) to pin 9 (RXD+) on the C-more Micro-Graphic 15-pin PLC communications port. The chart for the various Allen-Bradley PLCs includes recommended cables. Please refer to the specific PLC user manual for further details. Port2 is a 15-pin D-sub communication port that supports RS-232. Note: Recommended DC power supply to power the C-more Micro-Graphic Panel. the panel also has the ability to communicate with Allen-Bradley PLCs that support the Allen-Bradley DF1 and DH485 protocols. To enable the built-in 120 Ohm Termination Resistor. A1234567). the termination resistor is placed between the RXD– and RXD+ terminals on the PLC side of the connection between the touch panel and PLC. Compatibility and Connection Charts The following pages include charts that list the recommended cables and/or manufactured devices that can be used to make up the communications link between several different controllers and the C-more Micro-Graphic panel. 2nd Ed.g. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 A B C D ® EA1-TCL-M Hardware User Manual. AutomationDirect Part No.Chapter 6: PLC Communications DirectLOGIC PLCs Password Protection NOTE: DirectLOGIC PLCs support multi-level password protection of the ladder program. The multilevel password can be invoked by creating a password with an upper case "A" followed by any variation of seven numeric characters (e. This allows password protection while not locking the communication port to an operator interface. Modicon and Siemens Other 3rd party PLCs can be used with the C-more Micro-Graphic panel. The chart also refers to wiring diagrams that can be used to construct cables for connecting the PLC’s port to the panel’s port. GE. The Termination Resistor value is based on the characteristic impedance of the cable being used. RS-485 and RS-422. PSC-24-015 or PSC-24-030. Allen-Bradley As stated in this chapter’s introduction. SOLO Temperature Controller and GS Drives Drivers specific to these AutomationDirect control devices make it convienient to communicate with the C-more Micro-Graphic panels and simplify configuring objects with controller addresses. DirectLogic. An external class 2. Mitsubishi.

3.3 pin Port 1 RJ12 . A. manufactured or user constructed.3 pin RS-232 RJ12 .6 pin Port 2 RJ12 . Direct NET. 07/13 .) Find the Controller or PLC Family being used. Family CPU PLC Port & Type External DC Power Supply Using panel’s Port2 DB 15-pin . Direct NET. 2.Chapter 6: PLC Communications How to use the Compatibility and Connection Charts 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 A B C D 1. Rev.female Protocol(s) Components & Supported Network Type EA-2CBL RS-232 * See Diagram 16 RS-485 EA-2CBL RS-232 * See Diagram 17 RS-485 EA-2CBL RS-232 EA-2CBL RS-232 EA-2CBL-1 RS-232 * See Diagram 1 RS-422 * See Diagram 2 RS-485 Modbus only all versions CLICK Analog CPUs Productivity3000 all versions all versions Direct LOGIC DL05 D0-DCM Port1 RJ12 .6 pin Port2 RJ12 . Modbus RTU K-sequence. are required. 2nd Ed.6 pin Port 2 DB15HD (female) AutomationDirect Modbus (CLICK) AutomationDirect Productivity3000 Serial (P3-550) K-sequence.6 pin Port 1 RJ12 .6 pin RS-232 Port Terminal block . Example Compatibility & Connection Chart Controller C-more Micro-Graphic Panel Panel to PLC Cabling Components Required for Specific Port and Protocol being used.) Find the particular Controller or PLC model in the Controller family.) Determine the cable and other components. Modbus RTU Modbus RTU 6–6 ® EA1-TCL-M Hardware User Manual.6 pin Port3 Terminal block .

Rev. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 A B C D 6–7 ® EA1-TCL-M Hardware User Manual. Family CPU PLC Port & Type External DC Power Supply Using panel’s Port2 DB 15-pin . Port2 Communications Compatibility & Connection Chart Controller C-more Micro-Graphic Panel Panel to PLC Cabling Components Required for Specific Port and Protocol being used.female Protocol(s) Components & Supported Network Type EA-2CBL RS-232 * See Diagram 16 RS-485 EA-2CBL RS-232 * See Diagram 17 RS-485 EA-2CBL RS-232 * See Diagram 20 RS-485 * See Diagrams 18 and 19 RS-485 all versions CLICK Analog CPUs Productivity Series Do-more SOLO Temperature Controller GS Drives all versions Port1 RJ12 .6 pin RS-232 Port Terminal block .6 pin Port3 Terminal block . Do-more.6 pin Data terminals Port RJ12 .3 pin Port2 RJ12 .6 pin Port2 RJ12 . 07/13 . 2nd Ed. A. ProductivitySeries.3 pin RS-232 RJ12 . SOLO Temperature Controller and GS Drives Panel Powered via external power supply.6 pin AutomationDirect Modbus (CLICK) AutomationDirect Productivity3000 Serial (P3-550) AutomationDirect Do-more Serial AutomationDirect SOLO Temperature Controller AutomationDirect GS Drives all versions all versions all versions * Note: Wiring Diagrams for user constructed cables start on page 6-24.Chapter 6: PLC Communications AutomationDirect CLICK PLC.

Direct NET. 2nd Ed. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 A B C D Family CPU PLC Port & Type External DC Power Supply Using panel’s Port2 DB 15-pin . Direct NET.6 pin Port 1 RJ12 . A.female Protocol(s) Components & Supported Network Type K-sequence. Modbus RTU Modbus RTU * Note: Wiring Diagrams for user constructed cables start on page 6-24. Modbus RTU EA-2CBL RS-232 EA-2CBL RS-232 EA-2CBL-1 RS-232 * See Diagram 1 RS-422 * See Diagram 2 RS-485 Modbus only EA-2CBL RS-232 EA-2CBL-1 RS-232 * See Diagram 1 RS-422 * See Diagram 2 RS-485 Modbus only EA-2CBL RS-232 EA-2CBL-1 RS-232 * See Diagram 1 RS-422 * See Diagram 2 RS-485 Modbus only all versions Direct LOGIC DL05 D0-DCM Port 1 RJ12 . DL06. Modbus RTU Modbus RTU Port 1 RJ12 . D0-DCM Module & DL105 PLCs Panel Powered via external power supply. Direct NET.6 pin Port 2 RJ12 .Chapter 6: PLC Communications AutomationDirect DirectLOGIC DL05.6 pin all versions Port 2 DB15HD (female) Port 1 RJ12 .6 pin Port 2 DB15HD (female) K-sequence. Modbus RTU Modbus RTU Direct LOGIC DL06 K-sequence. 6–8 ® EA1-TCL-M Hardware User Manual. Direct NET.6 pin D0-DCM Port 2 DB15HD (female) K-sequence. Rev. 07/13 . Port2 Communications Compatibility & Connection Chart Controller C-more Micro-Graphic Panel Panel to PLC Cabling Components Required for Specific Port and Protocol being used.

female Protocol(s) Components & Supported Network Type K-sequence K-sequence K-sequence K-sequence. Modbus RTU Port 2 DB15HD (female) Modbus RTU Port 1 DB 25 pin (female) Port 1 RJ12 . Direct NET Direct LOGIC DL105 all versions Port 1 RJ12 .6 pin K-sequence. A. D2-DCM Module and WINPLC Panel Powered via external power supply.6 pin EA-2CBL RS-232 EA-2CBL RS-232 EA-2CBL RS-232 EA-2CBL RS-232 D2-230 Port 1 RJ12 . Direct NET. Rev.6 pin Port 1 RJ12 .6 pin Port 1 RJ12 . 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 A B C D 6–9 ® EA1-TCL-M Hardware User Manual. Modbus RTU EA-2CBL-1 RS-232 * See Diagram 1 RS-422 EA-2CBL RS-232 EA-2CBL-1 RS-232 * See Diagram 1 RS-422 * See Diagram 2 RS-485 Modbus only EA-4CBL-2 RS-232 * See Diagram 5 RS-422 EA-2CBL RS-232 Direct LOGIC DL205 D2-260 K-sequence. Direct NET. 2nd Ed.6 pin D2-240 D2-250-1 Port 2 DB15HD (female) Port 1 RJ12 . 07/13 .Chapter 6: PLC Communications DirectLOGIC DL205 PLCs. Port2 Communications Compatibility & Connection Chart Controller C-more Micro-Graphic Panel Panel to PLC Cabling Components Required for Specific Port and Protocol being used.6 pin Port 2 RJ12 . Family CPU PLC Port & Type External DC Power Supply Using panel’s Port2 DB 15-pin .6 pin D2-DCM Direct NET WINPLC Modbus RTU * Note: Wiring Diagrams for user constructed cables start on page 6-24.

4 pin Direct NET Direct NET Direct NET.6 pin Port 2 DB 25 pin (female) Port 1 DB 25 pin (female) EA-3CBL RS-232 EA-2CBL RS-232 EA-4CBL-2 RS-232 * See Diagram 3 RS-422 EA-4CBL-2 RS-232 * See Diagram 5 RS-422 D3-DCM D3-350 only * Note: Wiring Diagrams for user constructed cables start on page 6-24. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 A B C D Family CPU PLC Port & Type External DC Power Supply Using panel’s Port2 DB 15-pin . Modbus RTU Direct NET D3-340 Direct LOGIC DL305 D3-350 Port 2 RJ11 . A. Rev. Port2 Communications Compatibility & Connection Chart Controller C-more Micro-Graphic Panel Panel to PLC Cabling Components Required for Specific Port and Protocol being used. 6–10 ® EA1-TCL-M Hardware User Manual.female Protocol(s) Components & Supported Network Type Direct NET EA-4CBL-2 RS-232 * See Diagram 5 RS-422 D3-330 or D3-340 D3-232-DCU DB 25 pin (female) D3-422-DCU DB 25 pin (female) Port 1 RJ11 .4 pin Port 1 RJ12 . Direct NET.Chapter 6: PLC Communications DirectLOGIC DL305 PLCs and D3-DCM Module Panel Powered via external power supply. Modbus RTU K-sequence. 2nd Ed. Direct NET K-sequence. 07/13 .

Direct NET K-sequence K-sequence. Modbus RTU K-sequence. Rev. Modbus RTU K-sequence. Direct NET.6 pin Port 1 DB 25 pin (female) K-sequence K-sequence.Chapter 6: PLC Communications DirectLOGIC DL405 PLCs and D4-DCM Module. SOLO and GS Drives Panel Powered via external power supply. Family CPU PLC Port & Type External DC Power Supply Using panel’s Port2 DB 15-pin . Direct NET. Port2 Communications Compatibility & Connection Chart Controller C-more Micro-Graphic Panel Panel to PLC Cabling Components Required for Specific Port and Protocol being used. Direct NET D4-450 D4-DCM Direct NET * Note: Wiring Diagrams for user constructed cables start on page 6-24. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 A B C D 6–11 ® EA1-TCL-M Hardware User Manual. A. 07/13 .female Protocol(s) Components & Supported Network Type K-sequence EA-4CBL-1 RS-232 EA-4CBL-2 RS-232 * See Diagram 3 RS-422 EA-4CBL-1 RS-232 EA-4CBL-2 RS-232 * See Diagram 3 RS-422 EA-4CBL-1 RS-232 EA-4CBL-2 RS-232 * See Diagram 3 RS-422 * See Diagram 4 RS-422 EA-2CBL RS-232 EA-4CBL-2 RS-232 * See Diagram 5 RS-422 Port 0 DB 15 pin (female) D4-430 Port 1 DB 25 pin (female) Port 0 DB 15 pin (female) D4-440 Port 1 DB 25 pin (female) K-sequence. Direct NET Direct LOGIC DL405 Port 0 DB 15 pin (female) Port 1 DB 25 pin (female) Port 3 DB 25 pin (female) Port 2 RJ12 . 2nd Ed.

5/05 5/01. 6–12 ® EA1-TCL-M Hardware User Manual. 5/04. 5/03 all 8-pin mini-din port RJ45 8-pin phone plug 9-pin D-sub port RJ45 8-pin phone plug 9-pin D-sub port 9-pin D-sub port 9-pin D-sub port 25-pin D-sub port RJ45 8-pin phone plug all all Allen-Bradley PLC5 DF1 Full Duplex DH485/AIC/AIC+ all * Note: Wiring Diagrams for user constructed cables start on page 6-24. DF1 Half Duplex EA-SLC-232-CBL RS-232 EA-SLC-232-CBL RS-232 EA-SLC-232-CBL RS-232 EA-PLC5-232-CBL RS-232 * See Diagram 15 RS-422 EA-DH485-CBL RS-232 Allen-Bradley MicroLogix Allen-Bradley SLC500 Allen-Bradley ControlLogix Allen-Bradley CompactLogix Allen-Bradley FlexLogix 1000. DF1 Half Duplex DF1 Full Duplex. 1400. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 A B C D External DC Power Supply Family CPU PLC Port & Type Powered from an external 24 VDC source Using panel’s Port2 DB 15-pin . EA-MLOGIX-CBL DF1 Half Duplex RS-232 EA-DH485-CBL DH485/AIC/AIC+ RS-232 DF1 Full Duplex. Port2 Communications Compatibility & Connection Chart Controller C-more Micro-Graphic Panel Panel to PLC Cabling Components Required for Specific Port and Protocol being used. Rev. 07/13 . A. 2nd Ed. 1100.Chapter 6: PLC Communications Allen-Bradley PLCs Panel Powered via external power supply. 5/02.female Protocol(s) Components & Supported Network Type DF1 Full Duplex. 1200. 1500 5/03. EA-SLC-232-CBL DF1 Half Duplex RS-232 EA-DH485-CBL DH485/AIC/AIC+ RS-232 DF1 Full Duplex. DF1 Half Duplex DF1 Full Duplex.

90/70 15-pin D-sub port RJ45 Port 1 15-pin D-sub port Port 2 25-pin D-sub port 8-pin mini-din port 9-pin D-sub port 6-pin mini-din port 25-pin D-sub port 9-pin D-sub port SNPX EA-90-30-CBL RS-422 * See Diagram 11 RS-232 EA-90-30-CBL RS-422 EA-MITSU-CBL RS-422 EA-MITSU-CBL-1 RS-422 * See Diagram 13 RS-232C * See Diagram 14 RS-232C EA-OMRON-CBL RS-232 * See Diagram 6&7 RS-232 GE Micro 90. CPM2 C200 CPU 984 CPU. Quantum 113 CPU. Modicon and Siemens PLCs Panel Powered via external power supply. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 A B C D 6–13 ® EA1-TCL-M Hardware User Manual. 2nd Ed. C500 Host Link Omron CJ1. Rev. Omron.Chapter 6: PLC Communications GE. 9 & 10 RS-232 Siemens 9-pin D-sub port 0 or 1 PPI * See Diagram 12 RS-485 * Note: Wiring Diagrams for user constructed cables start on page 6-24. Using panel’s Port2 DB 15-pin . AEG Modicon Micro Series 110 CPU S7-200 CPU Host Link FINS Modicon varies Modbus RTU * See Diagram 8. Mitsubishi. CQM1. VersaMax Micro Melsec FX Series CPU Direct Mitsubishi Q / QnA Q / QnA C200 (Adapter).female Protocol(s) Components & Supported Network Type 90/30. External DC Power Supply Family CPU PLC Port & Type Powered from an external 24 VDC source. Port2 Communications Compatibility & Connection Chart Controller C-more Micro-Graphic Panel Panel to PLC Cabling Components Required for Specific Port and Protocol being used. A. 07/13 . CS1. CPM1.

Allen-Bradley MicroLogix 1000. DL405. Versamax Micro (Port2) 15-pin D-sub port (RS-422A) MITSUBISHI FX Series 25-pin port (RS-422A) MITSUBISHI FX Series 8-pin mini-DIN (RS-422A) OMRON Host Link (C200 Adapter. DL305 DCU and all DCM’s (RS-232C). PLC5 DH485 port (RS-232C) GE 90/30. 07/13 . 90/70. ControlLogix. Do-more. Direct LOGIC PLC RJ-12 port. D3-350. DL06. Rev. Direct LOGIC DL405 PLC 15-pin D-sub port. 1200. FlexLogix DF1 port (RS-232C) Allen-Bradley PLC-5 DF1 port (RS-232C) Allen-Bradley MicroLogix. 1400 & 1500 (RS-232C) Allen-Bradley SLC 5-03/04/05. DL105. A. D2-250 (250-1). Direct LOGIC PLC 25-pin D-sub port. DL205. DL405 (RS-232C). D3-350. D4-450 & H2-WinPLC (RS-232C) Direct LOGIC (VGA Style) 15-pin port. CompactLogix. D2-260 (RS-232C). 2nd Ed. 1100. DL05. EA-2CBL EA-2CBL-1 EA-3CBL EA-4CBL-1 EA-4CBL-2 EA-MLOGIX-CBL EA-SLC-232-CBL EA-PLC5-232-CBL EA-DH485-CBL EA-90-30-CBL EA-MITSU-CBL EA-MITSU-CBL-1 EA-OMRON-CBL 6–14 ® EA1-TCL-M Hardware User Manual. SLC 5-01/02/03. Micro 90. CLICK. DL06. D3-340 (RS-232C). C500) (RS-232C) Cable Part No.Chapter 6: PLC Communications 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 A B C D Cables from AutomationDirect Cable Description AutomationDirect Productivity Series. Direct LOGIC PLC RJ-11 port.

EA-DH485-CBL Part No. EA-MITSU-CBL Part No. EA-2CBL Part No. 2nd Ed. EA-OMRON-CBL 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 A B C D 6–15 ® EA1-TCL-M Hardware User Manual.Chapter 6: PLC Communications Cables from AutomationDirect (cont’d) Part No. A. Rev. EA-4CBL-2 Part No. EA-4CBL-1 Part No. EA-3CBL Part No. EA-90-30-CBL Part No. EA-2CBL-1 Part No. EA-PLC5-232-CBL Part No. EA-MITSU-CBL-1 Part No. EA-MLOGIX-CBL Part No. EA-SLC-232-CBL Part No. 07/13 .

2nd Ed. DL450. Direct LOGIC: To PLC 15-Pin HD Port EA-2CBL-1 Direct Logic PLC (VGA style) 15-pin HD port: D2-250. Do-more. DL105. CLICK & Direct LOGIC: To PLC RJ12 Port EA-2CBL Productivity Series. D2-260. 07/13 . The information presented will allow the user to construct their own cables if so desired. A. We recommend using 22 AWG shielded cable. Part numbers are included with the pre-made cables that can be purchased from AutomationDirect.N/C 1 1 = Frame GND shield HD = High Density Note: Use the above wiring diagram if you need to make your own cable. CLICK and Direct Logic PLC RJ12 port: To C-more Micro-Graphic DL05. DL350. DL06 RS-232C (p/n EA-2CBL-1) To C-more Micro-Graphic Serial Port2 Wiring Diagram 15-pin 15-pin HD D-sub D-sub 2 3 RXD TXD (male) (male) 15 = do not use 15 = do not use 8 = do not use 8 = do not use 2 3 TXD 7 = do not use 14 = do not use RXD 7 = Sig GND 15 15 14 = do not use 5 13 = do not use GND 7 6 = do not use 6 = donot use 13 = do not use 12 = do not use 5 = CTS 5 = Logic GND 12 = do not use 4 11 = do not use RTS 4 = RTS 4 = do not use 11 = do not use 10 = do not use CTS 5 3 = RXD 3 = RXD (232C) 1 6 10 = do not use 1 9 = do not use 2 = TXD 2 = TXD (232C) 9 = do not use 1 = +5 VDC . We recommend using 22 AWG shielded cable. D2-250-1. DL06. 6–16 ® EA1-TCL-M Hardware User Manual. Rev.Chapter 6: PLC Communications 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 A B C D Cables from AutomationDirect – Wiring Diagrams The following series of wiring diagrams show the connectors and wiring details for the communication cables that are used between the C-more Micro-Graphic panels and various PLCs. H2-WINPLC Serial Port2 RS-232C (p/n EA-2CBL) RJ12 6-pin Phone Plug (6P6C) 1 = Sig GND 2 = do not use 3 = RXD 4 = TXD 5 = do not use 6 = do not use TXD RXD Wiring Diagram 4 3 1 shield 3 2 5 1 RXD TXD 123456 GND 8 = do not use 7 = do not use 6 = do not use 5 = Logic GND 4 = do not use 3 = RXD (232C) 2 = TXD (232C) 1 = Frame GND 15-pin D-sub (male) 15 1 15 = do not use 14 = do not use 13 = do not use 12 = do not use 11 = do not use 10 = do not use 9 = do not use Note: Use the above wiring diagram if you need to make your own cable. DL205.

2nd Ed. We recommend using 22 AWG shielded cable. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 A B C D ® EA1-TCL-M Hardware User Manual. Rev. We recommend using 22 AWG shielded cable.Chapter 6: PLC Communications Cables from AutomationDirect – Wiring Diagrams (cont’d) Direct LOGIC: To PLC RJ11 Port EA-3CBL Direct Logic PLC RJ11 port: D3-340 RS-232C (p/n EA-3CBL) To C-more Micro-Graphic Serial Port2 RJ11 4-pin Phone Plug (4P4C) 1 = Sig ground 2 = do not use 3 = RXD 4 = TXD TXD RXD 1234 Wiring Diagram 4 3 1 shield 3 2 5 1 RXD TXD GND 8 = do not use 7 = do not use 6 = do not use 5 = Logic GND 4 = do not use 3 = RXD (232C) 2 = TXD (232C) 1 = Frame GND 15-pin D-sub (male) 15 1 15 = do not use 14 = do not use 13 = do not use 12 = do not use 11 = do not use 10 = do not use 9 = do not use Note: Use the above wiring diagram if you need to make your own cable. A. RS-232C (p/n EA-4CBL-1) To C-more Micro-Graphic Serial Port2 Wiring Diagram TXD 2 3 4 3 2 5 RXD TXD 15-pin D-sub 8 = YOM Sense (male) 7 = CTS 15 6 = do not use 5 = do not use 4 = Online 3 = RXD (232C) 2 = TXD (232C) 1 = YOP Sense 1 RXD 15 = Logic GND 14 = Logic GND 13 = Logic GND 12 = do not use 11 = do not use 10 = do not use 9 = do not use online GND 13 GND 14 GND 15 YOP CTS YOM 1 7 8 15-pin D-sub 8 = do not used (male) 7 = do not used 15 6 = do not used 5 = Logic GND 4 = do not used 3 = RXD (232C) 2 = TXD (232C) 1 1 = Frame GND 15 = do not use 14 = do not use 13 = do not use 12 = do not use 11 = do not use 10 = do not use 9 = do not use 1 shield Note: Use the above wiring diagram if you need to make your own cable. See PLC user manual for pin out details. 07/13 6–17 . EA-4CBL-1 To PLC 15-Pin Port Direct Logic PLC 15-pin D-sub port: DL405.

Chapter 6: PLC Communications

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 A B C D

Cables from AutomationDirect – Wiring Diagrams (cont’d)
Direct LOGIC:

EA-4CBL-2
To PLC 25-Pin Port

Direct Logic PLC 25-pin D-sub port: DL405, D3-350, DL305 DCU, and all DCMs, RS-232C (p/n EA-4CBL-2)

To C-more Micro-Graphic Serial Port2

15-pin D-sub 3 RXD 8 = do not use 13 = do not use 25 = do not use TXD 2 (male) 15 = do not use 12 = do not use 25 24 = do not use 7 = do not use 3 2 14 = do not use TXD 11 = do not use 23 = do not use RXD 15 13 = do not use 6 = do not use 10 = do not use 5 22 = do not use GND 7 5 = Logic GND 12 = do not use 9 = do not use 21 = do not use 4 4 = do not use 11 = do not use 8 = do not use 20 = do not use RTS 3 = RXD (232C) 10 = do not use 7 = Signal GND 19 = do not use CTS 5 2 = TXD (232C) 1 6 = do not use 9 = do not use 18 = do not use 5 = CTS 1 = Frame GND 1 17 = do not use 4 = RTS shield 16 = do not use 3 = RXD 2 = TXD 15 = do not use 1 1 = do not use 14 = do not use Note: Use the above wiring diagram if you need to make your own cable. We recommend using 22 AWG shielded cable.

25-pin D-sub (male)

Wiring Diagram

6–18

®

EA1-TCL-M Hardware User Manual, 2nd Ed. Rev. A, 07/13

Chapter 6: PLC Communications

Cables from AutomationDirect - Wiring Diagrams (cont’d)
Allen-Bradley:
To AB MicroLogix RS-232 communication channel

EA-MLOGIX-CBL
Allen-Bradley MicroLogix™ 1000/1100/1200/1400/1500 RS-232C (p/n EA-MLOGIX-CBL)
To C-more Micro-Graphic Serial Port2

1 = do not use 2 = Sig GND 3 = do not use 4 = RXD 5 = do not use 6 = do not use 7 = TXD 8 = do not use

Mini Din 8-pin Male
6 3 4 1 2 7 5 8

Wiring Diagram
0.290” TXD RXD GND

7 4 2 shield

3 2 5 1

RXD TXD

0.35” DIA. Nonstandard

keying

15-pin D-sub 8 = do not use (male) 7 = do not use 15 6 = do not use 5 = Logic GND 4 = do not use 3 = RXD (232C) 2 = TXD (232C) 1 1 = Frame GND

15 = do not use 14 = do not use 13 = do not use 12 = do not use 11 = do not use 10 = do not use 9 = do not use

Note: Use the above wiring diagram if you need to make your own cable. We recommend using 22 AWG shielded cable.

EA-SLC-232-CBL
To PLC 9-Pin Port

Allen-Bradley SLC 5-03/04/05, ControlLogix, CompactLogix, FlexLogix, DF1, RS-232C (p/n EA-SLC-232-CBL)

To C-more Micro-Graphic Serial Port2

9-pin D-sub (female) 1 = do not use 1 2 = RXD 3 = TXD 4 = do not use 5 = Signal GND 6 = do not use TXD 7 = do not use 8 = do not use RXD 9 = do not use GND 3 2 5

Wiring Diagram 3 2 5 shield 1

9

15-pin D-sub 8 = do not use (male) 7 = do not use 15 RXD 6 = do not use 5 = Logic GND TXD 4 = do not use 3 = RXD (232C) 2 = TXD (232C) 1 1 = Frame GND

15 = do not use 14 = do not use 13 = do not use 12 = do not use 11 = do not use 10 = do not use 9 = do not use

Note: Use the above wiring diagram if you need to make your own cable. We recommend using 22 AWG shielded cable.

EA-PLC5-232-CBL
To PLC 25-Pin Port

Allen-Bradley PLC5, DF1, RS-232C (p/n EA-PLC5-232-CBL)

To C-more Micro-Graphic Serial Port2

Wiring Diagram 25-pin 15-pin D-sub D-sub 3 RXD 8 = do not use 13 = do not use (male) 25 = do not use TXD 2 (male) 15 = do not use 12 = do not use 25 24 = do not use 3 2 TXD 7 = do not use 14 = do not use 11 = do not use 23 = do not use RXD 15 13 = do not use 6 = do not use 10 = do not use 5 22 = do not use GND 7 5 = Logic GND 12 = do not use 9 = do not use 21 = do not use 1 4 = do not use 11 = do not use 8 = do not use shield 20 = do not use 3 = RXD (232C) 10 = do not use 7 = Signal GND 19 = do not use 2 = TXD (232C) 1 6 = do not use 9 = do not use 18 = do not use 5 = do not use 1 = Frame GND 17 = do not use 4 = do not use 16 = do not use 3 = RXD 2 = TXD 15 = do not use 1 1 = do not use 14 = do not use Note: Use the above wiring diagram if you need to make your own cable. We recommend using 22 AWG shielded cable.

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 A B C D

®

EA1-TCL-M Hardware User Manual, 2nd Ed. Rev. A, 07/13

6–19

Chapter 6: PLC Communications

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 A B C D

Cables from AutomationDirect - Wiring Diagrams (cont’d)
Allen-Bradley:
To AB SLC500 DH-485 Port

EA-DH485-CBL
Allen-Bradley SLC500™, 5/01, /02, /03 DH-485 Point-to-Point RS-485A (p/n EA-DH485-CBL)
Wiring Diagram To C-more Micro-Graphic Serial Port2

1 = TXD/RXD+ 2 = TXD/RXD– 3 = do not use 4 = Signal GND 5 = LE 6 = do not use 7 = Signal GND 8 = do not use

RJ45 8-pin Phone Plug (8P8C)
TXD/RXD+ TXD/RXD–

1 2

13 9 10 11 12

Term. RD+ RD– SD+ SD– LE *

LE * GND GND

5 4 7 shield

6 5 1

15-pin D-sub 8 = do not use (male) 7 = do not use 15 6 = LE 5 = Logic GND 4 = do not use 3 = do not use 2 = do not use 1 1 = Frame GND

15 = do not use 14 = do not use 13 = Termination 12 = SD– (RS485) 11 = SD+ (RS485) 10 = RD– (RS485) 9 = RD+ (RS485)

* Note: The LE signal is wired in the cable as shown, but not required for point-to-point communications.

Note: Use the above wiring diagram to make your own cable. We recommend AutomationDirect p/n L19954 shielded cable or equivalent.

Allen-Bradley SLC500™, 5/01, /02, /03 DH-485/AIC to Multiple C-more 6” Micro-Graphic Panels RS-485A (using C-more cable p/n EA-DH485-CBL)
Allen-Bradley SLC 500 Modular PLC Controller
DH-485 Peripheral J2

DH-485 Link (See manufacturer’s literature for details.)

DH-485 Peripheral J2

CPU J1

CPU J1 Power

Channel 1 must be set to DH485.

Power

AB 1747-AIC DH485 Link Coupler AB 1747-C11 A Cable

AB 1747-AIC DH485 Link Coupler

C-more 6” Micro-Graphic Panel

C-more 6” Micro-Graphic Panel

Port2

Port2

C-more EA-DH485-CBL Cable

C-more EA-DH485-CBL Cable

Note: The above diagram shows connecting multiple C-more Micro-Graphic panels to an Allen-Bradley DH485/AIC network using the AB DH485 Link Coupler, p/n 1747-AIC. Select the “Allen-Bradly DH485/AIC SLC500 MircroLogix” driver in the C-more Programming Software when starting the project. Also, set the AB channel configuration for DH485.

6–20

®

EA1-TCL-M Hardware User Manual, 2nd Ed. Rev. A, 07/13

EA-SLC-232-CBL) Allen-Bradley SLC 5/03 Modular PLC Controller DH-485 Link (See manufacturer’s literature for details. Rev. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 A B C D ® EA1-TCL-M Hardware User Manual. Also.Chapter 6: PLC Communications Cables from AutomationDirect . AB 1761-NET-AIC AIC + Advanced Interface Converter C-more 6” Micro-Graphic Panel AB 1761-NET-AIC AIC + Advanced Interface Converter C-more EA-MLOGIX-CBL Cable AB 1747-CP3 RS-232 Cable C-more 6” Micro-Graphic Panel To additional C-more Touch Panel Port2 Port2 C-more EA-MLOGIX-CBL Cable C-more EA-SLC-232-CBL Cable Note: The above diagram shows connecting multiple C-more Micro-Graphic panels to an Allen-Bradley DH485/AIC network using the AB AIC+ Advanced Interface Converter. 2nd Ed. Select the “Allen-Bradly DH485/AIC SLC500 MircroLogix” driver in the C-more Micro Programming Software when starting the project.Wiring Diagrams (cont’d) Allen-Bradley: Allen-Bradley SLC500™ 5/03 DH-485/AIC to Multiple C-more 6” Micro-Graphic Panels (using C-more cables p/n EA-MLOGIX-CBL. A. p/n 1761-NET-AIC. 07/13 6–21 .) Channel 0 must be set to DH485. set the AB channel configuration for DH485.

We recommend AutomationDirect p/n L19853 shielded cable or equivalent. RS-422A (p/n EA-MITSU-CBL) To C-more Micro-Graphic Serial Port2 13 = do not use 12 = do not use 11 = do not use 10 = do not use 9 = do not use 8 = do not use 7 = Signal GND 6 = do not use 5 = do not use 4 = Signal GND 3 = SD+ (RS422) 2 = RD+ (RS422) 1 1 = do not use 15-pin Term.Wiring Diagrams (cont’d) GE: To PLC 15-Pin Port EA-90-30-CBL GE 90/30. RS-422A (p/n EA-90-30-CBL) To C-more Micro-Graphic Serial Port2 15-pin D-sub 8 = CTS(B’) (male) 7 = Logic GND 15 6 = do not use 5 = +5V 4 = do not use 3 = do not use 2 = do not use 1 = do not use 1 Wiring Diagram 15 = CTS(A’) 14 = do not use 13 = SD(B) 12 = SD(A) 11 = RD(B’) 10 = RD(A’) 9 = do not use SD(B) SD(A) RD(B’) RD(A’) GND CTS(B’) CTS(A’) +5V 13 9 10 11 12 5 13 12 11 10 7 8 15 5 shield 15-pin D-sub 8 = do not use (male) 15 = do not use RD– 7 = do not use 14 = do not use 15 13 = Termination SD+ 6 = do not use 5 = Logic GND 12 = SD– (RS422) SD– 4 = do not use 11 = SD+ (RS422) 3 = do not use 10 = RD– (RS422) 2 = do not use 1 9 = RD+ (RS422) 1 = Frame GND Term. 07/13 . Rev. 90/70. Mitsubishi: To PLC 25-Pin Port EA-MITSU-CBL Mitsubishi FX Series 25-pin D-sub port. A. Micro 90 and VersaMax Micro (Port 2) 15-pin D-sub port. D-sub 9 RD+ 25 = do not use SD+ (male) 8 = do not use 15 = do not use 24 = do not use 25 10 RD– 7 = do not use SD– 16 14 = do not use 23 = do not use 15 6 = do not use 2 11 13 = Termination SD+ 22 = do not use RD+ 5 = Logic GND 12 = SD– (RS422) 21 = do not use RD– 15 12 SD– 4 = do not use 11 = SD+ (RS422) 20 = do not use 5 7 3 = do not use 10 = RD– (RS422) 19 = do not use GND 2 = do not use 1 9 = RD+ (RS422) 18 = do not use GND 4 1 = Frame GND 17 = do not use 1 shield 16 = SD– (RS422) 15 = RD– (RS422) 14 = do not use Note: Use the above wiring diagram to make your own cable. 3 25-pin D-sub (male) Wiring Diagram 13 6–22 ® EA1-TCL-M Hardware User Manual. 2nd Ed. We recommend AutomationDirect p/n L19853 shielded cable or equivalent.Chapter 6: PLC Communications 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 A B C D Cables from AutomationDirect . RD+ 1 Note: Use the above wiring diagram to make your own cable.

25-pin D-sub (male) Wiring Diagram 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 A B C D ® EA1-TCL-M Hardware User Manual. We recommend AutomationDirect p/n L19853 shielded cable or equivalent. Omron: To PLC 25-Pin Port EA-OMRON-CBL Omron Host Link (C200 Adapter. Rev. 07/13 6–23 . We recommend using 22 AWG shielded cable. A. RS-422A (p/n EA-MITSU-CBL-1) To C-more Micro-Graphic Serial Port2 1 = RD– (RS-422) 2 = RD+ (RS-422) 3 = Sig GND 4 = SD– (RS-422) 5 = do not use 6 = do not use 7 = SD+ (RS-422) 8 = do not use Mini Din 8-pin Male SD+ SD– 6 3 4 1 2 7 5 8 Wiring Diagram 7 4 2 1 3 shield 13 9 10 11 12 5 1 Term.Wiring Diagrams (cont’d) Mitsubishi: To PLC 8-Pin Port EA-MITSU-CBL-1 Mitsubishi FX Series 8-pin MINI-DIN. 2nd Ed. RS-232C (p/n EA-OMRON-CBL) To C-more Micro-Graphic Serial Port2 15-pin D-sub 3 RXD 8 = do not use 13 = do not use 25 = do not use TXD 2 (male) 15 = do not use 12 = do not use 25 24 = do not use 7 = do not use 3 2 14 = do not use TXD 11 = do not use 23 = do not use RXD 15 13 = do not use 6 = do not use 10 = do not use 5 22 = do not use GND 7 5 = Logic GND 12 = do not use 9 = do not use 21 = do not use 4 4 = do not use 11 = do not use 8 = do not use 20 = do not use RTS 3 = RXD (232C) 10 = do not use 7 = Signal GND 19 = do not use CTS 5 2 = TXD (232C) 1 6 = do not use 9 = do not use 18 = do not use 5 = CTS 1 = Frame GND 1 17 = do not use 4 = RTS shield 16 = do not use 3 = RXD 2 = TXD 15 = do not use 1 1 = do not use 14 = do not use Note: Use the above wiring diagram if you need to make your own cable.Chapter 6: PLC Communications Cables from AutomationDirect . C500). RD+ RD– SD+ SD– RD+ RD– GND 15-pin D-sub 8 = do not use (male) 7 = do not use 15 6 = do not use 5 = Logic GND 4 = do not use 3 = do not use 2 = do not use 1 1 = Frame GND 15 = do not use 14 = do not use 13 = Termination 12 = SD– (RS422) 11 = SD+ (RS422) 10 = RD– (RS422) 9 = RD+ (RS422) Note: Use the above wiring diagram to make your own cable.

A. We recommend AutomationDirect p/n L19954 shielded cable or equivalent. Rev. 2nd Ed. We recommend AutomationDirect p/n L19853 shielded cable or equivalent. TERM EA-COMCON-3 Note: Use the above wiring diagram to make your own cable. TERM EA-COMCON-3 Note: Use the above wiring diagram to make your own cable. 6–24 ® EA1-TCL-M Hardware User Manual. Refer to the wiring diagram examples starting on page 6-34 if more than one PLC will be connected to a panel. NOTE: The RS-422 and RS-485 wiring diagrams shown above are not for multi-drop networks involving connecting more than one PLC to a panel. Diagram 2 User Constructed C-more Micro-Graphic Serial Port2 Wiring Diagram GND SD– SD+ RD– RD+ Direct LOGIC ZIPLink ZL-CMA15L Adapter Module to EA-COMCON-3 Terminal Block Adapter RS-485A – PLC D2-260 or DL06 – Port 2 RS-232 RXD RS-232 TXD TERMINATE +5V SIGNAL GND RS-422/485 RX– ZL-CMA15L RXD TXD TX+ RX+ TXD +5V RXD RS422/485 TXRXSG 232 RS-422/485 TX– RS-422/485 RX+ RS-422/485 TX+ shield ZL-CMA15L See ZL-CMA15L specifications on termination resistor jumper. 07/13 .Chapter 6: PLC Communications 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 A B C D User Constructed Cables – Wiring Diagrams Diagram 1 User Constructed C-more Micro-Graphic Serial Port2 Wiring Diagram GND SD– SD+ RD– RD+ Direct LOGIC ZIPLink ZL-CMA15L Adapter Module to EA-COMCON-3 Terminal Block Adapter RS-422A – PLC D2-250 (-1). D2-260 or DL06 – Port 2 RS-232 RXD RS-232 TXD TERMINATE +5V SIGNAL GND RS-422/485 RX– ZL-CMA15L RXD TXD TX+ RX+ TXD +5V RXD RS422/485 TXRXSG 232 RS-422/485 TX– RS-422/485 RX+ RS-422/485 TX+ shield ZL-CMA15L See ZL-CMA15L specifications on termination resistor jumper.

RD+ 1 Note: Use the above wiring diagram to make your own cable. We recommend AutomationDirect p/n L19853 shielded cable or equivalent. Refer to the wiring diagram examples starting on page 6-34 if more than one PLC will be connected to a panel. A. 2nd Ed. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 A B C D ® EA1-TCL-M Hardware User Manual. 07/13 6–25 . We recommend using AutomationDirect p/n L19853 shielded cable or equivalent.Chapter 6: PLC Communications User Constructed Cables – Wiring Diagrams (cont’d) Diagram 3 To PLC 25-Pin Port User Constructed Direct LOGIC D4-430/D4-440/D4-450 Port 1 and D3-350 Port 2. Diagram 4 To PLC 25-Pin Port User Constructed Direct LOGIC D4-450 Port 3 RS-422A RTS and CTS are not present on this port. To C-more Micro-Graphic Serial Port2 13 = TXD– (RS422) 12 = TXD+ (RS422) 11 = do not use 10 = do not use 9 = do not use 8 = do not use 7=0V 6 = do not use 5 = do not use 4 = do not use 3 = do not use 2 = do not use 1 = do not use 25-pin D-sub (male) Wiring Diagram TXD+ TXD– RXD+ RXD– 0V 1 25 = RXD– (RS422) 24 = RXD+ 25 (RS422) 23 = do not use 22 = do not use 21 = do not use 20 = do not use 19 = do not use 18 = do not use 17 = do not use 16 = do not use 15 = do not use 14 = do not use 13 9 10 11 12 5 1 12 13 24 25 7 shield 15-pin D-sub 8 = do not use (male) 15 = do not use RD– 7 = do not use 14 = do not use 15 6 = do not use 13 = Termination SD+ 5 = Logic GND 12 = SD– (RS422) SD– 4 = do not use 11 = SD+ (RS422) 3 = do not use 10 = RD– (RS422) 2 = do not use 1 9 = RD+ (RS422) 1 = Frame GND Term. all RS-422A To C-more Micro-Graphic Serial Port2 13 = do not use 12 = do not use 11 = CTS+ 10 = RXD– (RS422) 9 = RXD+ (RS422) 8 = do not use 7=0V 6 = do not use 5 = do not use 4 = do not use 3 = do not use 2 = do not use 1 = do not use 25-pin D-sub (male) Wiring Diagram TXD+ TXD– RXD+ RXD– 0V RTS– CTS– RTS+ CTS+ 13 9 10 11 12 5 1 25 = do not use 24 = do not use 25 23 = CTS– 22 = do not use 21 = do not use 20 = do not use 19 = RTS+ 18 = RTS– 17 = do not use 16 = TXD– (RS422) 15 = do not use 14 = TXD+ (RS422) 14 16 9 10 7 18 23 19 11 shield 15-pin D-sub (male) 8 = do not use 15 = do not use 7 = do not use RD– 14 = do not use 15 6 = do not use 13 = Termination SD+ 5 = Logic GND 12 = SD– (RS422) SD– 4 = do not use 11 = SD+ (RS422) 3 = do not use 10 = RD– (RS422) 2 = do not use 1 9 = RD+ (RS422) 1 = Frame GND Term. NOTE: The RS-422 wiring diagram shown above is not for multi-drop networks involving connecting more than one PLC to a panel. RD+ Note: Use the above wiring diagram to make your own cable. Rev.

Chapter 6: PLC Communications 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 A B C D User Constructed Cables – Wiring Diagrams (cont’d) Diagram 5 To PLC 25-Pin Port User Constructed Direct LOGIC D2-DCM*. A. Wiring Diagram 13 Term. Diagram 6 To PLC 9-Pin Port User Constructed Omron FINS (CQM1. CPM2. Rev. CJ1 & CS1) RS-232C To C-more Micro-Graphic Serial Port2 9-pin D-sub (male) 1 = do not use 2 = TXD 3 = RXD 4 = RTS 1 5 = CTS 9 Wiring Diagram 6 = do not use TXD 7 = do not use 8 = do not use RXD 9 = Signal GND SG RTS CTS 2 3 9 4 5 shield 3 2 5 RXD TXD 15-pin D-sub 8 = do not use (male) 7 = do not use 6 = do not use 15 5 = Logic GND 4 = do not use 3 = RXD (232C) 2 = TXD (232C) 1 = Frame GND 1 15 = do not use 14 = do not use 13 = do not use 12 = do not use 11 = do not use 10 = do not use 9 = do not use 1 Note: Use the above wiring diagram to make your own cable. D3-DCM* & D4-DCM* RS-422A To C-more Micro-Graphic Serial Port2 *Note: The DCM modules must be set for: Direct NET Slave. We recommend using 22 AWG shielded cable. 15-pin 25 = do not use D-sub 24 = do not use TXD+ 14 9 RD+ (male) 15 = do not use 8 = do not use 23 = do not use 15 10 RD– 7 = do not use 14 = do not use 25 22 = do not use TXD– 15 13 = Termination 11 SD+ 6 = do not use 21 = do not use RXD+ 17 5 = Logic GND 12 = SD– (RS422) 20 = do not use 12 SD– 4 = do not use 16 RXD– 11 = SD+ (RS422) 19 = do not use 3 = do not use 7 5 10 = RD– (RS422) 18 = do not use 0V 2 = do not use 1 9 = RD+ (RS422) 17 = RXD+ 11 RTS– 1 = Frame GND (RS422) 13 16 = RXD– CTS– (RS422) RTS+ 10 15 = TXD– 1 CTS+ 12 (RS422) 1 14 = TXD+ shield (RS422) Note: Use the above wiring diagram to make your own cable. HEX mode. CPM1. 2nd Ed. 6–26 ® EA1-TCL-M Hardware User Manual. 13 = CTS– 12 = CTS+ 11 = RTS– 10 = RTS+ 9 = do not use 8 = do not use 7=0V 6 = do not use 5 = do not use 4 = do not use 3 = do not use 2 = do not use 1 = do not use 25-pin D-sub (male) NOTE: The RS-422 wiring diagram shown above is not for multi-drop networks involving connecting more than one PLC to a panel. We recommend using AutomationDirect p/n L19853 shielded cable or equivalent. Refer to the wiring diagram examples starting on page 6-34 if more than one PLC will be connected to a panel. C200. 07/13 .

We recommend using 22 AWG shielded cable. 2nd Ed. Rev. Diagram 8 To PLC 9-Pin Port User Constructed Modicon™ ModBus™.Chapter 6: PLC Communications User Constructed Cables – Wiring Diagrams (cont’d) Diagram 7 To Peripheral Port Cable User Constructed Omron Host Link CQM1 using CQM1-CIF02 Peripheral Port Connecting Cable RS-232C To C-more Micro-Graphic Serial Port2 9-pin D-sub (male) 1 = do not use 2 = RXD 3 = TXD 4 = do not use 5 = Signal GND 1 9 Wiring Diagram 6 = do not use TXD 7 = do not use 8 = do not use RXD 9 = do not use GND 3 2 5 shield 3 2 5 1 RXD TXD 15-pin D-sub 8 = do not use (male) 7 = do not use 6 = do not use 15 5 = Logic GND 4 = do not use 3 = RXD (232C) 2 = TXD (232C) 1 = Frame GND 1 15 = do not use 14 = do not use 13 = do not use 12 = do not use 11 = do not use 10 = do not use 9 = do not use Note: Use the above wiring diagram to make your own cable. 984 CPU. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 A B C D ® EA1-TCL-M Hardware User Manual. A. Quanum 113 CPU RS-232C To C-more Micro-Graphic Serial Port2 9-pin D-sub (male) 1 = do not use 2 = RXD 3 = TXD 4 = DTR 5 = Signal GND 1 9 TXD Wiring Diagram 3 2 5 4 6 7 8 shield 1 3 2 5 RXD TXD 6 = DSR 7 = RTS 8 = CTS 9 = do not use RXD GND DTR DSR RTS CTS 15-pin D-sub 8 = do not use (male) 7 = do not use 15 6 = do not use 5 = Logic GND 4 = do not use 3 = RXD (232C) 2 = TXD (232C) 1 1 = Frame GND 15 = do not use 14 = do not use 13 = do not use 12 = do not use 11 = do not use 10 = do not use 9 = do not use Note: Use the above wiring diagram to make your own cable. We recommend using 22 AWG shielded cable. 07/13 6–27 .

110 CPU 612-xx RS-232C 9-pin D-sub (female) Wiring Diagram TXD RXD GND 1 = do not use 1 2 = TXD 3 = RXD 4 = do not use 5 = Signal GND 6 = do not use 7 = do not use 8 = do not use 9 = do not use 9 2 3 5 shield 3 2 5 1 RXD TXD 15-pin D-sub 8 = do not use (male) 7 = do not use 6 = do not use 15 5 = Logic GND 4 = do not use 3 = RXD (232C) 2 = TXD (232C) 1 = Frame GND 1 15 = do not use 14 = do not use 13 = do not use 12 = do not use 11 = do not use 10 = do not use 9 = do not use Note: Use the above wiring diagram to make your own cable. We recommend using 22 AWG shielded cable. Diagram 10 To PLC RJ45 Port User Constructed Modicon™ ModBus™ with RJ45 RS-232C To C-more Micro-Graphic Serial Port2 1 = do not use 2 = do not use 3 = TXD 4 = RXD 5 = Logic GND 6 = RTS 7 = CTS 8 = do not use RJ45 8-pin Phone Plug (8P8C) Wiring Diagram TXD RXD GND RTS CTS 3 4 5 6 7 shield 3 2 5 1 15-pin D-sub (male) 8 = do not use TXD 7 = do not use 15 6 = donot use 5 = Logic GND 4 = do not use 3 = RXD (232C) 2 = TXD (232C) 1 1 = Frame GND RXD 15 = do not use 14 = do not use 13 = do not use 12 = do not use 11 = do not use 10 = do not use 9 = do not use Note: Use the above wiring diagram to make your own cable.Chapter 6: PLC Communications 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 A B C D User Constructed Cables – Wiring Diagrams (cont’d) Diagram 9 To PLC 9-Pin Port User Constructed To C-more Micro-Graphic Serial Port2 AEG Modicon™ Micro Series: 110 CPU 311-xx. 07/13 . 110 CPU 512-xx. 2nd Ed. We recommend using 22 AWG shielded cable. Rev. A. 110 CPU 411-xx. 6–28 ® EA1-TCL-M Hardware User Manual.

We recommend using 22 AWG shielded cable. RD+ SD+ RD– SD– 3 8 5 shield 6 = +5 VDC RS-485 7 = +24 VDC Signal A 8 = RS485 Sig A 9 = do not use Logic Common 1 15-pin D-sub (male) 8 = do not use 15 = do not use 7 = do not use 14 = do not use 15 6 = do not use 13 = Termination 5 = Logic GND 12 = SD– (RS485) 4 = do not use 11 = SD+ (RS485) 3 = do not use 10 = RD– (RS485) 2 = do not use 1 9 = RD+ (RS485) 1 = Frame GND Note: Use the above wiring diagram to make your own cable. 07/13 6–29 . Rev. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 A B C D ® EA1-TCL-M Hardware User Manual. Diagram 12 To PLC 9-Pin Port User Constructed Siemens S7-200 CPU Port 0 or 1 RS-485A To C-more Micro-Graphic EA-MG-SP1 Serial Port with DC Power Adapter 9-pin D-sub (male) 1 = Logic Com 2 = Logic Com 3 = RS485 Sig B 4 = do not use 5 = Logic Com 1 9 Wiring Diagram RS-485 Signal B 13 9 11 10 12 5 Term. A. 2nd Ed. We recommend AutomationDirect L19954 shielded cable or equivalent.Chapter 6: PLC Communications User Constructed Cables – Wiring Diagrams (cont’d) Diagram 11 To PLC RJ45 Port 1 User Constructed GE VersaMax Micro Port 1 RS-232C To C-more Micro-Graphic Serial Port2 1 = RTS 2 = CTS 3 = RXD 4 = TXD 5 = DCD 6 = DTR 7 = +5V 8 = GND RJ45 8-pin Phone Plug (8P8C) TXD RXD GND Wiring Diagram 4 3 8 shield 3 2 5 1 8 = do not use RXD 7 = do not use 15-pin D-sub (male) 15 = do not use 13 = do not use 12 = do not use 11 = do not use 10 = do not use 9 = do not use TXD 6 = donot use 5 = Logic GND 4 = do not use 3 = RXD (232C) 2 = TXD (232C) 1 1 = Frame GND 15 14 = do not use Note: Use the above wiring diagram to make your own cable.

We recommend using 22 AWG shielded cable. 2nd Ed. Diagram 14 User Constructed Mitsubishi Q02 / Q02H / Q06H / Q12H / Q25H Serial Driver and QnA Serial Driver with Direct Connection to the Serial Port on Q00 and Q01 CPU’s RS-232C To C-more Micro-Graphic Serial Port2 To PLC 6-Pin Port 1 = RXD (232C) 2 = TXD (232C) 3 = Logic GND 4 = do not use 5 = do not use 6 = do not use Mini Din 6-pin Male TXD Wiring Diagram 2 3 2 1 8 = do not use 7 = do not use RXD 6 = donot use TXD 5 = Logic GND 15-pin D-sub (male) 15 = do not use 13 = do not use 12 = do not use 4 = do not use 11 = do not use 5 3 4 GND 3 3 = RXD (232C) 10 = do not use 1 1 1 2 2 = TXD (232C) 9 = do not use shield 1 = Frame GND Note: Use the above wiring diagram to make your own cable. Rev.Chapter 6: PLC Communications 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 A B C D User Constructed Cables – Wiring Diagrams (cont’d) Diagram 13 To PLC 9-Pin Port User Constructed Mitsubishi Q / QnA Serial PLC QJ71C24N RS-232C Wiring Diagram To C-more Micro-Graphic Serial Port2 9-pin D-sub (female) 1 1 = CD 2 = RXD 3 = TXD 4 = DTR 5 = Signal GND CD DTR DSR RS 6 = DSR 7 = RS CS 8 = CS 9 = do not use TXD RXD GND 1 4 6 7 8 3 2 5 shield 3 2 5 1 15-pin D-sub 8 = do not use (male) 7 = do not use 15 6 = do not use 5 = Logic GND 4 = do not use RXD 3 = RXD (232C) TXD 2 = TXD (232C) 1 1 = Frame GND 15 = do not use 14 = do not use 13 = do not use 12 = do not use 11 = do not use 10 = do not use 9 = do not use 9 Note: Use the above wiring diagram if you need to make your own cable. 07/13 . We recommend using 22 AWG shielded cable. 5 6 15 14 = do not use RXD 6–30 ® EA1-TCL-M Hardware User Manual. A.

) 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 A B C D ® EA1-TCL-M Hardware User Manual. Rev.Chapter 6: PLC Communications User Constructed Cables – Wiring Diagrams (cont’d) Diagram 15 To PLC 25-Pin Port User Constructed Allen Bradley PLC5 DF1 RS-422 To C-more Micro-Graphic Serial Port2 15-pin D-sub 10 RD – 8 = do not use 13 = do not use 25 = do not use TXD + 2 (male) 15 = do not use 12 = do not use 25 24 = do not use 7 = do not use 12 3 14 = do not use SD – 11 = do not use 23 = do not use RXD + 15 13 = do not use 6 = do not use 10 = do not use 5 7 22 = do not use GND 5 = Logic GND 12 = SD – 9 = do not use 21 = do not use 9 RD + 4 = do not use 11 = SD + 8 = do not use TXD – 14 20 = do not use 3 = do not use 10 = RD – 7 = Signal GND 11 SD + 16 19 = do not use RXD – 2 = do not use 1 6 = do not use 9 = RD + 18 = do not use 5 = do not use 1 = Frame GND 1 17 = do not use 4 = do not use shield 16 = RXD – 3 = RXD + 2 = TXD + 15 = do not use 1 1 = do not use 14 = TXD – Notes: 1. + LG RS-485 Signal B Logic Ground 8 5 shield 1 15-pin D-sub (male) 8 = do not use 15 = do not use 7 = do not use 14 = do not use 15 6 = do not use 13 = Termination 5 = Logic GND 12 = SD– (RS485) 4 = do not use 11 = SD+ (RS485) 3 = do not use 10 = RD– (RS485) 2 = do not use 1 9 = RD+ (RS485) 1 = Frame GND Note: Use the above wiring diagram to make your own cable. 2nd Ed. Use 120 ohm resistors as termination resistors (Term. Refer to the PLC-5 Programmable Controllers User Manual Switch Setting Reference for details on switch settings to define the controller's serial port electrical interface. 25-pin D-sub (male) Wiring Diagram Diagram 16 CLICK Com Port 3 User Constructed AutomationDirect CLICK PLC Analog CPU RS-485 To C-more Micro-Graphic Serial Port2 Wiring Diagram RS-485 Signal A RS-485 Signal A RS-485 Signal B Logic Ground 13 9 11 10 12 5 Term. Handshaking is turned off 3. RD+ SD+ RD– SD– 3 Term. A. We recommend AutomationDirect p/n L19954 shielded cable or equivalent. We recommend using AutomationDirect p/n L19853 shielded cable or equivalent. 4. Use the above wiring diagram to make your own cable. 07/13 6–31 . 2. Polarities must be swapped.

/ RXD- 8 5 shield Ground 1 15-pin D-sub (male) 8 = do not use 15 = do not use 7 = do not use 14 = do not use 15 6 = do not use 13 = Termination 5 = Logic GND 12 = SD– (RS485) 4 = do not use 11 = SD+ (RS485) 3 = do not use 10 = RD– (RS485) 2 = do not use 1 9 = RD+ (RS485) 1 = Frame GND Note: Use the above wiring diagram to make your own cable. 07/13 .Chapter 6: PLC Communications 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 A B C D User Constructed Cables – Wiring Diagrams (cont’d) Diagram 17 Removable Connector included with Productivity3000 CPU User Constructed AutomationDirect Productivity PAC RS-485 To C-more Micro-Graphic Serial Port2 Wiring Diagram TXD+ / RXD+ TXD+ / RXD+ TXD. We recommend AutomationDirect p/n L19954 shielded cable or equivalent. Use 120 ohm resistors as termination resistors (Term. A. RD+ SD+ RD– SD– 3 Term./ RXDGround 13 9 11 10 12 5 Term. + G TXD. We recommend AutomationDirect p/n L19772 shielded cable or equivalent. Rev. Port 2: GND 3: SG – 6 1 4: SG + User Constructed C-more Micro-Graphic Serial Port2 GND RD– SD– SD+ RD+ shield TERM EA-COMCON-3 Note: Use the above wiring diagram to make your own cable. 2nd Ed. 6–32 ® EA1-TCL-M Hardware User Manual.) Diagram 18 GS Serial Drive Connection via RS-485 Wiring Diagram GS Drives RS-485 Serial Comm.

Use the above wiring diagram to make your own cable. A. The terminal connections at the ZL-CDM-RJ12X4 are different for multi-drop networks than for the direct drive to panel connection. Diagram 20 User Constructed SOLO Temperature Controller to C-more Micro-Graphic Panel (RS-485) SL4824 Series RS-485 DATA + DATA – 11 12 Wiring Diagram GND DATA – RD – SD – DATA + SD + RD + C-more Micro-Graphic Serial Port2 SL4848 Series DATA – 9 RS-485 10 DATA + SL4896 Series SL9696 Series DATA – shield TERM EA-COMCON-3 1 RS-485 2 DATA + Note: Use the above wiring diagram to make your own cable.Chapter 6: PLC Communications User Constructed Cables – Wiring Diagrams (cont’d) Diagram 19 User Constructed GS3 GS Drive 6-Pin RJ12 port Multiple GS Drives Connected to One C-more Micro-Graphic panel (RS-485) GS1 GS Drive 6-Pin RJ12 port Wiring Diagram C-more Micro-Graphic Serial Port2 GND RD – SD – SD + RD + * * GS2 GS Drive 6-Pin RJ12 port * 6 5 4 3 2 1 TB1 shield TERM EA-COMCON-3 *Connect with ZL-RJ12-CBL-2P cable Notes: 1. We recommend AutomationDirect p/n L19954 shielded cable or equivalent. We recommend AutomationDirect p/n L199772 shielded cable or equivalent. Rev. 2nd Ed. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 A B C D ® EA1-TCL-M Hardware User Manual. 07/13 6–33 . 2.

A.Chapter 6: PLC Communications 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 A B C D RS-422A Multi-Drop Wiring Diagram Example DL06 and DL205 used for illustration purposes DirectLOGIC DL06 PLC DirectLOGIC DL205 PLC Port 2 ZL-CMA15L RXD (Slave) 232 Cable Adapter (ZL-CMA15L shown) TXD TX+ RX+ RS422/485 TXD Port 2 ZL-CMA15L RXD (Slave) Shielded Cable 232 Cable Adapter (ZL-CMA15L shown) TXD TX+ RX+ RS422/485 When connecting to a DirectLogic PLC use connector ZL-CMA15L or ZL-CMA15 Shielded Cable TXD +5V Notes: 1. Wiring Diagram for this example. We recommend Belden 8103 shielded cable or equivalent. ZL-CMA15(L) To DL06 PLC port 2 Used as example RXD+ RXD– TXD+ RTS+ RXD TX- RX- SG RXD+ RXD– TXD+ RTS+ CTS+ CTS+ TXD– RTS– TXD– RTS– CTS– 7 10 9 6 * 13 11 14 12 15 7 10 9 6 13 11 14 12 15 15-pin HD D-sub 8 = do not use (male) 15 = CTS– 7 = Sig GND 14 = CTS+ 15 6 = RXD– 13 = RXD+ 5 = do not use 12 = RTS4 = do not use 11 = RTS+ 3 = do not use 1 10 = TXD– 6 2 = do not use 9 = TXD+ 1 = do not use HD = High Density RXD+ RXD– TXD+ TXD– Signal GND TXD+ TXD– RXD+ RXD– shield Signal GND * Termination resistors required at both ends of the network receive data signals to match the impedance of the cable (between 100 and 500 ohms). 07/13 CTS– To D2-250-1 PLC port 2 Used as example GND GND +5V RXD TX- RX- SG . Rev. 2. 2nd Ed. Typical RS-422 Multi-Drop Wiring Diagram using DirectLogic pin numbers to illustrate 6–34 ® EA1-TCL-M Hardware User Manual.

2. 07/13 6–35 SHD RD+ RD– SD+ SD– . then use an external resistor matched to the cable 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 A B C D TXD– RTS– using DirectLogic pin numbers to illustrate ® GND GND EA1-TCL-M Hardware User Manual. Rev.Chapter 6: PLC Communications RS-422AMulti-DropWiringDiagramExample(cont’d) DL06 and DL205 used for illustration purposes DirectLOGIC DL06 PLC C-more 6” Micro-Graphic Panel with EA-COMCON-3 Port2 (Slave) (Master) Port 2 ZL-CMA15L RXD TXD TX+ RX+ RS422/485 232 Shielded Cable TXD Shielded Cable When connecting to a DirectLogic PLC use connector ZL-CMA15L or ZL-CMA15 Notes: 1. ZL-CMA15(L) To DL06 PLC port 2 Used as example RXD+ RXD– TXD+ RTS+ CTS+ +5V RXD TX- RX- SG Cable Adapter (ZL-CMA15L shown) To C-more Micro-Graphic Serial Port2 CTS– Term. We recommend Belden 8103 shielded cable or equivalent. Wiring Diagram for this example. 2nd Ed. If the cable impedance is different. A. Jumper pin into the network. EA-COMCON-3 * 7 10 9 6 13 11 14 12 15 5 10 9 12 11 13 1 15-pin HD D-sub 8 = do not use (male) 15 = CTS– 7 = Sig GND 14 = CTS+ 15 6 = RXD– 13 = RXD+ 5 = do not use 12 = RTS4 = do not use 11 = RTS+ 3 = do not use 1 10 = TXD– 6 2 = do not use 9 = TXD+ 1 = do not use HD = High Density RXD+ RXD– TXD+ TXD– Signal GND TXD+ TXD– 15-pin 8 = do not use D-sub 7 = do not use (male) 15 6 = do not use 5 = Logic GND 4 = do not use 3 = do not use 2 = do not use 1 1 = Frame GND RXD+ RXD– 15 = do not use 14 = do not use 13 = Termination 12 = SD– (RS422) 11 = SD+ (RS422) 10 = RD– (RS422) 9 = RD+ (RS422) shield Signal GND shield Termination resistors required at both ends of the * network receive data signals to match the impedance to 9 on the C-more 6” Micro-Graphic Serial Port2 Typical RS-422 Multi-Drop Wiring Diagram (cont’d) 13 15-pin connector to place the 120⏲ internal resistor of the cable (between 100 and 500 ohms).

07/13 . Wiring Diagram for this example.Chapter 6: PLC Communications 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 A B C D RS-485AMulti-DropWiringDiagramExample DL06 and DL205 used for illustration purposes DirectLOGIC DL06 PLC DirectLOGIC DL205 PLC Port 2 (Slave) ZL-CMA15 or ZL-CMA15L TX+ RX+ (Slave) ZL-CMA15L RXD TXD RS422/485 232 TXD Port 2 ZL-CMA15L RXD +5V RXD TX- RX- SG Shielded Cable 232 Cable Adapter (ZL-CMA15L shown) TXD TX+ RX+ RS422/485 When connecting to a DirectLogic PLC use connector ZL-CMA15L or ZL-CMA15 Shielded Cable TXD +5V Notes: 1. 2nd Ed. ZL-CMA15(L) RXD TX- RX- SG To DL06 PLC port 2 Used as example RXD+ RXD– TXD+ RTS+ CTS+ TXD– RTS– CTS– GND GND To D2-250-1 PLC port 2 Used as example RXD+ RXD– TXD+ RTS+ CTS+ TXD– RTS– CTS– TXD+ / RXD+ TXD– / RXD– Signal GND 7 6 10 13 * 9 11 14 12 15 7 6 10 13 9 11 14 12 15 15-pin HD D-sub 8 = do not use (male) 15 = CTS– 7 = Sig GND 14 = CTS+ 15 6 = RXD– 13 = RXD+ 5 = do not use 12 = RTS4 = do not use 11 = RTS+ 3 = do not use 1 10 = TXD– 6 2 = do not use 9 = TXD+ 1 = do not use HD = High Density TXD+ / RXD+ TXD– / RXD– Signal GND shield * Termination resistors required at both ends of the network to match the impedance of the cable (between 100 and 500 ohms). Typical RS-485 Multi-Drop Wiring Diagram using DirectLogic pin numbers to illustrate 6–36 ® EA1-TCL-M Hardware User Manual. Rev. 2. A. We recommend Belden 9842 shielded cable or equivalent.

Jumper pin 13 to 9 on the C-more 6” Micro-Graphic Serial Port2 15-pin connector to place the 120⏲ internal resistor into the network. To DL06 PLC port 2 Used as example GND To C-more Micro-Graphic Serial Port2 GND EA-COMCON-3 * 7 6 10 13 9 11 14 12 15 5 10 12 9 11 13 1 15-pin HD D-sub 8 = do not use (male) 15 = CTS– 7 = Sig GND 14 = CTS+ 15 6 = RXD– 13 = RXD+ 5 = do not use 12 = RTS4 = do not use 11 = RTS+ 3 = do not use 1 10 = TXD– 6 2 = do not use 9 = TXD+ 1 = do not use HD = High Density TXD+ / RXD+ TXD– / RXD– Signal GND 15-pin 8 = do not use D-sub 15 = do not use 7 = do not use (male) 14 = do not use 15 13 = Termination 6 = do not use 5 = Logic GND 12 = SD– (RS485) 4 = do not use 11 = SD+ (RS485) 3 = do not use 10 = RD– (RS485) 2 = do not use 1 9 = RD+ (RS485) 1 = Frame GND TXD+ / RXD+ TXD– / RXD– shield Signal GND shield Termination resistors required at both ends of the *network receive data signals to match the impedance Typical RS-485 Multi-Drop Wiring Diagram (cont’d) using DirectLogic pin numbers to illustrate ® of the cable (between 100 and 500 ohms). Wiring Diagram for this example. Rev. ZL-CMA15(L) RXD+ RXD– TXD+ RTS+ CTS+ TXD– RTS– CTS– Term. 07/13 6–37 SHD RD+ RD– SD+ SD– . A. then use an external resistor matched to the cable 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 A B C D EA1-TCL-M Hardware User Manual.Chapter 6: PLC Communications RS-485AMulti-DropWiringDiagramExample(cont’d) DL06 and DL205 used for illustration purposes DirectLOGIC DL06 PLC C-more 6” Micro-Graphic Panel with EA-COMCON-3 Port2 (Slave) Shielded Cable (Master) Port 2 ZL-CMA15L RXD TXD TX+ RX+ RS422/485 232 TXD Shielded Cable +5V RXD TX- RX- SG Cable Adapter (ZL-CMA15L shown) When connecting to a DirectLogic PLC use connector ZL-CMA15L or ZL-CMA15 Notes: 1. 2. We recommend Belden 9842 shielded cable or equivalent. If the cable impedance is different. 2nd Ed.

.

. . . . . . . .. . . . . .7–2 Check Operating Voltage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . .MAINTENANCE In This Chapter. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7–3 Run Tests under the System Setup Screens . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7–6 . . . CHAPTER 7 Project Backup . .7–4 Check Settings under the System Setup Screens . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7–5 Check Project Functionality . . . . . . . .7–3 Check Physical Conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7–6 Checks from the C-more Micro-Graphic Programming Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7–2 Check Transmit and Receive Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7–2 Check Operating Environment . . . . . . .7–5 Cleaning the Display Screen . . .

4 VDC (6. 2nd Ed. Rev. Connect an external 12-24 VDC power source when the panel is installed in its application for full brightness.2 VDC (630mA)). CORROSIVE 8 Check Operating Voltage Check the input voltage that is powering the C-more Micro-Graphic panel to make sure it is within the appropriate range. Most of these items should be scheduled quarterly or bi-annually.5W @ 10. non-condensing). 07/13 . The following are some suggestions of items to include in a preventive maintenance list or schedule. NOTE: When the panel is powered through Port1 from a connected PC.Chapter 7: Maintenance 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 A B C D Maintenance Although the C-more® Micro-Graphic panels require very little maintenance. the screen brightness is diminished because the panel is running in Low-Power Mode. Project Backup During a routine preventive maintenance schedule is a good time to make sure that there is an up-to-date backup of the application project. setting up a routine maintenance schedule will ensure the longevity of the product in your application. Make sure the C-more Micro-Graphic panel is operating within the specified humidity range: (5–95% RH.2-26. Check Operating Environment Make sure the C-more Micro-Graphic panel is operating in the proper temperature range: (0 to 50 °C (32 to 122 °F)). 7–2 ® EA1-TCL-M Hardware User Manual. Make sure the operating environment is free of corrosive vapors and gasses. 24 VDC: The acceptable voltage range to the panel is 10. A.

8 15 1 9 TxD Indicator Port2 RxD Indicator Port2 EA1-T6CL + serial number EA1-T4CL EA1-T6CL 4 Check Physical Conditions Make sure that harmful chemicals are not being used around the C-more Micro-Graphic panel.CONT. A. See Chapter 2: Specifications for identification of the materials on the face of the panels and accessory bezels.5W Date code:**** MADE IN CHINA LISTED 7M17 IND.19-0. 1 2 3 4 5 MODEL:EA1-T4CL INPUT:12-24V 0. C-more Color Micro-Graphic Panel Communication Port Status Indicators R**. Replace the mounting gasket if there are any signs of deterioration. Rev. Information on replacement gaskets can be found in Chapter 9: Replacement Parts. There should be activity on both the TxD and RxD LED indicators when connected serially to a PLC or control device and data is being updated on the screen. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 A B C D ® EA1-TCL-M Hardware User Manual. 1 2 3 4 5 TxD Indicator Port2 MODEL:EA1-T6CL R INPUT:12-24V 6. Check the mounting gasket to make sure it is sealing properly and has not deteriorated. Look for any deterioration of the panel’s bezel and front display area.EQ.EQ. Also make sure that there is clearance around the panel as shown in Chapter 4: Installation and Wiring.Chapter 7: Maintenance Check Transmit and Receive Indicators During a routine maintenance check is a good time to take a quick look at the status indicators on the back of the C-more Micro-Graphic panel. 2nd Ed.38A Class2 Date code:9048 MADE IN CHINA R 7M17 IND. EA1-T4CL+094018001 RxD Indicator Port2 R01. Check to make sure that none of the cooling vents around the inside section of the C-more Micro-Graphic panel are clogged with dust or debris. 07/13 2 3 7–3 .CONT. or if there is any evidence that moisture/liquids have penetrated to the inside of the enclosure where the panel is mounted.

PLC Enquiry Test 3.Performs a test to verify either the RS-232 or the RS485/422 serial communications functionality from the 15-pin connector (Port 2) on the panel is operating correctly. A. Display Test UP DWN ENT ENT Serial Port . the internal beeper and touch screen operation. ® EA1-TCL-M Hardware User Manual. Buzzer Test . Touch Panel Test .Tests the communications with the selected PLC protocol between the panel and a connected PLC. A loop back connector inserted into the port is required for proper testing. Rev. Serial Port .Chapter 7: Maintenance Run Tests under the System Setup Screens 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 A B C D 7–4 Use the C-more Micro-Graphic panel’s System Setup Screens to test communication port. 2nd Ed. Wiring diagrams to build RS-232 and RS-485/422 loop back connectors are shown below. RS-232 Loop-back Connector User Constructed 15-pin D-sub (male) 2 TXD 15 RS-422/485 Loop-back Connector User Constructed 7 CTS 15-pin D-sub (male) 8 RTS 9 11 10 RXD+ TXD+ RXD– TXD– 1 15 3 7 8 RXD CTS RTS 1 12 Wiring Diagram Wiring Diagram PLC Enquiry Test . BAK TEST MENU 1. See Chapter 5: System Setup Screens for additional details. 07/13 . This test is used to make sure the touch screen area is responding properly. Touch Panel Test 5.Use this option to test the internal audible beeper of the panel. PLC connectivity.Loop Back Test . Buzzer Test 4.Tests the response of the touch screen area to contact.Loop Back 2.

07/13 7–5 .Used to enable or disable the internal audible beeper. Rev. Dry the surface when finished with a lint free cloth. striking the screen with a hard object. or using excessive force when pressing the touch screen. Calibration .Used to calibrate the touch screen on the panel. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 A B C D ® EA1-TCL-M Hardware User Manual. The longevity of the touch screen can be increased by the use of the EA-4-COV2 or EA-6COV2 clear screen overlay. A. acetone. avoid touching the screen with sharp objects. using abrasives on the screen.Chapter 7: Maintenance Check Settings under the System Setup Screens Use the C-more Micro-Graphic panel’s System Setup Screens to check the various settings such as the beep and orientation. the default is beep on. See Chapter 3: Accessories for additional information on the screen overlay. etc. 2nd Ed. Cleaning the Display Screen The display screen should be cleaned periodically by wiping it with a lint free damp cloth using a mild soap solution.) which may damage the plastic housing and touch screen. Beep . alcohol. See Chapter 5: System Setup Screens for additional details. Do not use cleaning solvents (ammonia. To prevent damage to the touch screen.

The programming software can also be used to update the panel’s firmware to the latest version. A.Chapter 7: Maintenance Check Project Functionality 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 A B C D 7–6 During routine maintenance is a good time to check the functionality of your application. The Panel Information window shown below will indicate the panel type. making sure that various areas on different screens do what they were designed to do. An outline or specification for the application is a useful tool for testing the various aspects of your application. 2nd Ed. mask ROM version. you can check the status of the panel from the Panel Information window. firmware version. if a keypad bezel has been installed. As a starting point. and the panel is connected to the PC. ® EA1-TCL-M Hardware User Manual. now is a good time to also check these aids. 07/13 . Rev. and the PLC protocol selected for its serial communication ports. EA-MG-PGMSW. the total memory. you may want to run through all the screens to make sure they are accessible if the project allows this. installed. free memory. Checks from the C-more Micro-Graphic Programming Software If you have a PC available with the C-more Micro-Graphic Programming Software. memory used. If there are any trouble-shooting procedures programmed into the C-more Micro-Graphic panel application.

Chapter 7: Maintenance

Notes:
_____________________________________________________________ _____________________________________________________________ _____________________________________________________________ _____________________________________________________________ _____________________________________________________________ _____________________________________________________________ _____________________________________________________________ _____________________________________________________________ _____________________________________________________________ _____________________________________________________________ _____________________________________________________________ _____________________________________________________________ _____________________________________________________________ _____________________________________________________________ _____________________________________________________________ _____________________________________________________________ _____________________________________________________________ _____________________________________________________________ _____________________________________________________________ _____________________________________________________________ _____________________________________________________________ _____________________________________________________________ _____________________________________________________________ _____________________________________________________________ _____________________________________________________________ _____________________________________________________________ _____________________________________________________________ _____________________________________________________________ _____________________________________________________________ _____________________________________________________________ _____________________________________________________________ _____________________________________________________________ _____________________________________________________________
®

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 A B C D

EA1-TCL-M Hardware User Manual, 2nd Ed. Rev. A, 07/13

7–7

TROUBLESHOOTING
In This Chapter...

CHAPTER

8

C-more Micro-Graphic Panel does not Power up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8–2 Display is Blank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8–2 Display is Dim . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8–3 No User Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8–3 Lost Firmware – Red ‘Update Mode’ Screen Displayed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8–4 Updating Firmware . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8–4 No Communications between Panel and PC (Personal Computer) . . . . . . . . . . . .8–5 No Communications between Panel and PLC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8–7 Panel & PLC Error Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8–8 C-more Micro-Graphic Panel Runtime Errors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8–9 Reset to Factory Default . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8–10 Electrical Noise Problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8–10

If there is communication activity. Indicator activity shows that the panel is communicating with the PLC. and the panel is powered from a 12-24 VDC power source. check the PLC program.Chapter 8: Troubleshooting 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 A B C D Troubleshooting The following are some problems that may be encountered during the installation and operation of your C-more® Micro-Graphic panel. check the incoming DC voltage level to the adapter with a voltmeter. EA1-T4CL+094018001 RxD Indicator Port2 MODEL:EA1-T6CL INPUT:12-24V 6. but the panel has power. 2. Rev.EQ. If the panel’s display is blank. but the display is still blank.38A Class2 Date code:9048 MADE IN CHINA R 7M17 IND. Display is Blank 1.4 VDC. 8 15 1 9 RxD Indicator Port2 TxD Indicator Port2 EA1-T6CL + serial number NOTE: When the panel is powered through Port1 from a connected PC. 1 2 3 4 5 MODEL:EA1-T4CL INPUT:12-24V 0. 8–2 ® EA1-TCL-M Hardware User Manual. Powered from 12-24 VDC: a. If the panel’s display is blank.19-0. Connect an external 12-24 VDC power source when the panel is installed in its application for full brightness. 1 2 3 4 5 R LISTED 2 7M17 IND. The screen will be in the off state if a 0 has been placed in the current screen tag. determine cause and replace. not responding.2-26. check any fusing that may be in the circuit. C-more Micro-Graphic Panel does not Power up 1. The DC voltage level to the adapter should be in the range of 10.CONT. 3. If the fuse is open. b. 07/13 4 . power the panel from a 12-24 VDC power source. 2nd Ed. If the incoming DC voltage is zero. and the panel is powered from the PC via the USB programming cable. 2. We have made some suggestions on what to check in order to correct the problem. not responding. there is the possibility the program in the PLC is controlling the display. If the setup screen displays. The panel will change to the System Setup Screen menu even if the screen is being forced to display a blank screen by the PLC program.CONT. R**. Powered from 5 VDC: a.5W Date code:**** MADE IN CHINA TxD Indicator Port2 3 R01.EQ. A. press the F1 and F5 keys simultaneously for 3 seconds. If the panel’s display is blank. The LED indicators should be on or flashing at a fast rate. check the TxD and RxD indicators on the back side of the panel while the panel is communicating with the PLC. the screen brightness is diminished because the panel is running in Low-Power Mode.

The observed brightness does not change when the panel is powered through Port1 from the PC. and then select item 1: Brightness. Do Information you want to > 2. BAK BAK SETTING 1. the screen brightness is diminished because the panel is running in Low-Power Mode. A. Select the Setting menu. 2nd Ed. download your project to the panel. BAK SETUP MENU 1. If this does not happen. Reset to Factory Def 6. If the panel is displaying the message "No User Program" after it is powered up. 2. exit Setting > from System 3. Brightness > 2. Connect an external 12-24 VDC power source when the panel is installed in its application for full brightness. Using the EA-MG-PGMSW C-more Micro-Graphic Programming Software. Exit > No[F1] / Yes[F5] ENT UP DWN ENT 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 A B C D ® EA1-TCL-M Hardware User Manual. No User Program 1. 07/13 8–3 . 4. Rotation > ENT Brightness NXT UP DWN ENT Current Value : 10 UP DWN APL ENT 1. Hourglass > 7. Touch/Key Beep > 3. Clear User Memory 5. then there is no project downloaded into the panel.Chapter 8: Troubleshooting Display is Dim NOTE: When the panel is powered through Port1 from a connected PC. Rev. The default value is 10. Screen? Test Menu > NO USER PROGRAM 4. See note above. Adjust the current value from 1 to 16 and the panel's brightness should become greater as the value moves toward 16 and it should become less as the value moves toward 1. Press the F1 and F5 keys simultaneously for 3 seconds and the panel will bring up the the System Setup Screen menu. 3. 2. then the panel may need to be replaced. Calibration > 4.

) Cycle power to the panel. try the following steps in the order shown: 1.) Cycle power to the panel. 4.Chapter 8: Troubleshooting Lost Firmware – ‘Update Mode’ Screen Displayed 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 A B C D 8–4 If the C-more Micro-Graphic panel’s firmware becomes corrupted or for some reason is lost from the panel’s memory. 07/13 . The panel should come up in the Update Mode screen as shown below. read the project from the panel and save to a desired location. ® EA1-TCL-M Hardware User Manual.com. NOTE: Software and Firmware Version 3.) Create a backup copy of the project on the PC. To resolve the problem. . This can happen if communication between the PC and the panel is interupted during a firmware update.A. Updating Firmware The panel firmware version must match both the programming software version and the version that the program was saved as. Version 2.) If the problem persists. Transfer the project to the panel. call Tech Support @ 770-844-4200 in the U. the panel will display the Update Mode screen as shown below. 2. 2nd Ed. update the firmware to the panel using the Update Firmware utility under the Panel pull down menu in the EA-MG-PGMSW Programming Software. 3. For example. Rev. 2.5 or later is required with model EA1-T6CL. From the C-more Micro-Graphic programming software.automationdirect.) Open the project in the updated programming software.) If there is still a problem. 3. =Update Mode= Data Transfer . depress function keys F1 and F5 while cycling power to the panel. 5.0 or later is required with model EA1-T4CL.) Update the firmware to the panel using the Update Firmware utility under the Panel pull down menu in the EA-MG-PGMSW Programming Software. Perform Step 2 again. if a version needs to be updated to take advantage of new functionality or product line additions follow these steps: 1. Available for free download at www. 4.) If the problem persists. A.S. Save the project.) Update the programming software on the PC. .

1. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 A B C D ® EA1-TCL-M Hardware User Manual. A. When the device is properly installed and the USB programming cable connects the panel to the PLC. the port will be identified as a serial communications port with an assigned COM port number. C-more Color Micro Graphic Panel User PC USB-CBL-AB6 NOTE: The panel has an internal USB to serial converter at Port1. No communications between panel and PC continued top of next page. 2nd Ed. Panel not on setup screen (press F1 and F5) . 2. Rev.Double check the programming cable to make sure the panel is correctly connected to the USB port on the PC.Press and hold the F1 and F5 buttons simultaneously for three seconds to enter the setup screen. 07/13 8–5 .Chapter 8: Troubleshooting No Communications between Panel and PC (Personal Computer) There are three possible causes that prevent transferring the project to the C-more MicroGraphic panel. Cable not connected .

07/13 . click on the Device Manager button. call Technical Support at (770) 844-4200. try connecting the programming cable to a different USB port on the PC and try again. 2.If the C-more Micro-Graphic panel is on the setup screen and the cable connection is correct. When the device is properly installed and the USB programming cable connects the panel to the PLC. This will open Windows ® Device Manager. Follow these steps to re-install the driver: 1. the USB driver may not be correctly installed or the driver has a problem.M. A. view the active ports by clicking the + button beside the Ports (COM & LPT) menu item. Not using the correct COM port assigned to the USB connection . Unplug the cable between the PC and the C-more Micro-Graphic panel. to 6:00 P. 5. Uninstall the C-more Micro-Graphic programming software. If the problem persists. 4. 2nd Ed. Eastern Time. ® EA1-TCL-M Hardware User Manual. Make sure the install USB driver checkbox is selected.M. 3. available from 9:00 A. If you cannot find the C-more Micro Comm Port under Ports (COM & LPT) in Device Manager. Rev. the port will be identified as a serial communications port with an assigned COM port number. In the Device Manager window. 3. The C-more MicroGraphic panel uses a USB driver called C-more Micro.Chapter 8: Troubleshooting No Communications between Panel and PC (Personal Computer) (cont’d) 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 A B C D 8–6 NOTE: The panel has an internal USB to serial converter at Port1. then check the PC COM port setting. If you have selected the correct COM port and the error still occurs. COM4 is the USB port used in this example. If you are unsure which COM port the C-more Micro-Graphic programming cable is connected to. Re-install the C-more Micro-Graphic programming software.

Verify that the correct PLC protocol is selected and properly configured. NOTE: For communications to be present between the panel and PLC. 2. Selecting a lower communication rate in Panel Manager may help the panel resist noise. NOTE: Electrical noise. The communication settings are incorrect . See Chapter 5. then the panel and PLC are communicating. then it should be suspected that either: 1. If there is activity on the LED indicators. A. The serial port on the PLC is defective.5W Date code:**** MADE IN CHINA LISTED 4 2 7M17 IND. Serial Port .CONT. 07/13 8–7 . Check the Txd and Rxd status indicators of Port2. Port is selected. 1 2 3 4 5 MODEL:EA1-T6CL R INPUT:12-24V 6. 1. pulse generating wiring and/or improper grounding can also cause problems with communications. Refer to the Electrical Noise Problems section in this chapter for additional help if electrical noise is suspected.Open Panel Manager in the C-more Micro-Graphic programming software and verify that the correct panel Comm. 8 15 1 9 RxD Indicator Port2 EA1-T6CL + serial number If there is no activity on one or both TxD and RxD LED status indicators.Try a proven cable. If possible switch the panel with a panel that is communicating properly.EQ.Loop Back Test. TxD Indicator Port2 3 R01. 3. the panel must contain a project requesting data from the PLC. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 A B C D ® EA1-TCL-M Hardware User Manual. The indicator LED’s should be on or flashing at a fast rate. 2nd Ed. Rev. 4. The cable is bad and needs to be replaced . Test panel serial port.Chapter 8: Troubleshooting No Communications between Panel and PLC The C-more Micro-Graphic panel communicates with a designated PLC or controlling device through the panel’s RS-232 / RS-485 / RS-422 communications port (Port2).

NOTE: See Appendix A: Panel & PLC Error Code Tables for a complete list of all error codes. correct handshaking signals. A. The diagnostics also monitor and display any of the errors that the designated PLC generates if there is a problem with the PLC’s communications. If a C-more Micro-Graphic communication error does occur. Panel Communications Error Code Example P001: PLC COM Time Out Start Stop ® EA1-TCL-M Hardware User Manual. wrong packet format.Chapter 8: Troubleshooting Panel & PLC Error Codes 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 A B C D 8–8 The C-more Micro-Graphic panel includes built-in PLC communication protocol diagnostics that monitor the exchange of data between the panel and the PLC. incorrect data bytes. Rev. 07/13 . The PLC generated errors are interpreted by the C-more Micro-Graphic programming software and are displayed across the top of the panel’s display embedded as a hexadecimal value in error code P499. 2nd Ed. addressing errors. The error code with error message will blink off and on. the error message will be displayed in the upper left of the panel’s display screen along with the error code number. The diagnostics look for the proper exchange of data. etc.

EA-MG-SP1 or EA-MG-P1 optional power adapter module for a C-more Unsupported module detected 3” Micro-Graphic panel is installed on a C-more 6” Micro-Graphic panel. Check for proper grounding. Cycle power at the panel. 2. Resend the project. Provide 12-24 VDC power to the optional module. all power connections and then reconnect the USB cable for the panel to run in Low-Power mode via the USB connection. Cycle power at the panel. Refer to Chapter 5 for details. These errors are displayed in a popup window in the center of the panel’s display.xx. Remove the EA-MG-SP1 or EA-MG-P1. 3. reset panel options. Rev. Resend the project. The panel was powered in High Power mode (24 VDC power supply). 07/13 8–9 . 4.Chapter 8: Troubleshooting C-more Micro-Graphic Panel Runtime Errors The C-more Micro-Graphic panel includes built-in diagnostics that check for proper operation of the panel when it is running a project that has been transferred to its memory. Protocol Module Check Sum Error. Troubleshooting a Panel Runtime Error: Follow these steps to troubleshoot a panel runtime error. Either re-establish the 24 VDC power connection or remove USB cable. If the error still occurs. A. Faults detected while the panel is running will produce a “Runtime” error. Cycle power. Micro-Graphic Panel Errors Error Code Error Message R001 R002 R003 R004 R005 R006 R100 R101 PC software tool Timeout CRC Error occurred during project transfer from PC. transformers. Use the C-more Micro-Graphic programming software to read the program from the panel and save a backup copy. Resend Project file to Panel. SW Ver. Reconnect The bus power. Panel Info (Not Project) will be initialized. From the Setup Menu screen. each error message will display sequentially for three seconds with a two second delay between each message. etc. Use software Ver. Update to current version programming software and panel firmware. When only one panel error is active. Project Check Sum Error. 2nd Ed. that message will display continuously until it is no longer active. R102 EA-MG-SP1 or EA-MG-P1 optional power adapter module is installed on a C-more 3” Micro-Graphic panel without a 12-24 VDC power source. 1. Resend the project. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 A B C D ® EA1-TCL-M Hardware User Manual. reset the panel back to factory default. Mismatch. Option module detected without external power Possible Solutions Check cables and connections. 24 VDC power has been lost and the panel is now running on USB External power fail. See Chapter 8 for Electrical Noise Problems. Resend Project File to Panel Panel Check Sum Error. Check the area for sources of noise: electrical motors. Check the panel cable connections.xx. Panel Errors If more than one panel error occurs. NOTE: User memory is cleared when factory defaults are reset.

A good earth ground can be the single most effective way to correct noise problems.Chapter 8: Troubleshooting Reset to Factory Default 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 A B C D 8–10 Factory default values can be reset by pressing F2 and F4 while cycling power to the panel. 2nd Ed. If a ground is not available. Loose ground wires are more susceptible to noise than the other wires in your system. A. but only if wired correctly. Ensure all ground wires are single point grounds and are not daisy chained from one device to another. Selecting a lower communication rate in Panel Manager may help the panel better handle noise. DC sources should be well-grounded good quality supplies. Never run communication cables or low-voltage power wiring close to high voltage wiring or pulse generating wiring that controls such devices as solenoids. tighten all connections in your system. Installing a properly wired isolation transformer (neutral grounded) for all AC sources can help the problem. Electrical noise can enter the system through the power source for the touch panel. introducing noise into the system. Use the C-more Micro-Graphic programming software to read the program from the panel iand save a backup copy. VFDs. A loose wire can act as a large antenna. install a ground rod as close to the system as possible. servos. etc. 07/13 . Rev. Review Chapter 4: Installation & Wiring if you have questions regarding how to ground the touch panel. • Horizontal orientation NOTE: User memory is cleared when factory defaults are reset. Ground metal enclosures around the system. ® EA1-TCL-M Hardware User Manual. Therefore. Electrical Noise Problems Most noise problems result from improper grounding of the system. The Factory Default values are: • Brightness value of 10 • The internal audible beeper enabled • Forced touch panel calibration • User program cleared from memory • Hourglass icon delay of 350 ms.

. . . . . . . ..9–2 Replacement Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .REPLACEMENT PARTS In This Chapter. . . . . .. .9–2 Customizing the Function Keys Insert Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CHAPTER 9 Replacement Parts Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9–3 . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3 blank. 1 F1-F5) Replacement function key label insert for C-more 6” Micro-Graphic panels (pk of 5. 1 F1-F5 for landscape. A 1 F1-F5) Panel Gaskets EA-MG4-GSK and Clear Screen Overlays B EA-MG6-S6ML-GSK EA-4-COV2 and EA-6-COV2 C D Replacement mounting clip for C-more 4” and 6” Micro-Graphic panel and keypad bezels (pk of 8) Replacement adapter DC power connector (pk of 5) Replacement mounting gasket for C-more 4” Micro-Graphic panels Replacement mounting gasket for C-more 6” Micro-Graphic panels Replacement mounting gasket for C-more 6” Micro-Graphic keypad bezels EA-MG6-BZ2(P) Replacement function key label insert for C-more 4” Micro-Graphic panels (pk of 4. 11 1 F1-F5 for portrait) 4” Function Keys Label Inserts (pk of 8) EA-MG4-FKL 12 Keypad Bezel Gasket DC Power Connector EA-MG6-BZ2-GSK 13 EA-MG-DC-CON 14 (pk of 5) (pk of 4. 3 blank. 3 blank. Rev. 2nd Ed. A. 07/13 . 1 F1-F5 for portrait) 4” Clear Screen Overlay (pk of 3) 6” Clear Screen Overlay (pk of 3) Replacement Parts Overview (pk of 3) 9–2 ® EA1-TCL-M Hardware User Manual.Chapter 9: Replacement Parts 1 Part Number Description EA-MG-BZ2-BRK 2 EA-MG-DC-CON EA-MG4-GSK 3 EA-MG6-S6ML-GSK EA-MG6-BZ2-GSK 4 EA-MG4-FKL 5 EA-MG-S6ML-FKL 6 EA-4-COV2 EA-6-COV2 7 Replacement Parts 6” Function Keys Label Inserts 8 EA-MG6-S6ML-FKL Mounting Clips 9 EA-MG-BZ2-BRK 10 (pk of 5. 1 F1-F5 for landscape. 3 blank.

Chapter 9: Replacement Parts Customizing the Function Keys Insert Label Step 1 . Step 2 .15] 0.20 [106.Install the new insert into the slot in the side of the panel and lock tab into place.563 [14.Remove the protective film from the blank key label insert.709 [18.Remove existing function key label insert using a small tool such as jeweler’s screw driver. 4.5] Typical Units: inches [mm] 4.7] 0. Step 3 .508 [12. A.9] EA-MG4-FKL 0.3] 0. print and apply self-adhesive labels to the blank insert.0] Typical EA-MG6-S6ML-FKL Units: inches [mm] 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 A B C D ® EA1-TCL-M Hardware User Manual.803 [122.282 [7. Step 4 . Rev.0] 0.If desired. 2nd Ed. 07/13 9–3 .650 [16.

.

. . APPENDIX A Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .A–31 . .A–26 Omron FINS Protocol – PLC Error Code Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .A–25 Omron Host Link Protocol – PLC Error Code Table . . . . . . . .A–7 DirectLOGIC – K-Sequence PLC Error Code Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .A–11 GE Error Code P499 Explanation . . . . . .A–23 Mitsubishi Q / QnA Series – PLC Error Codes .A–6 DirectLOGIC Error Code P499 Explanation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .PANEL & PLC ERROR CODE TABLES In This Appendix. .A–9 Allen-Bradley DH485 Protocol – PLC Error Code Tables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .A–23 Omron Error Code P499 Explanation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .A–7 Allen-Bradley Error Code P499 Explanation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .A–3 Modbus Protocols Error Code P499 Explanation . . . . . .A–5 Do-more Error Code P499 Explanation . . . . . . .A–4 Productivity3000 Error Code P499 Explanation . . . . . .A–27 Siemens Error Code P499 Explanation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .A–13 GE SNPX Protocol – PLC Error Code Tables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .A–2 C-more Micro-Graphic Panel Error Code Table . . .A–30 Siemens PPI Protocol – PLC Error Code Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .A–8 Allen-Bradley DF1 Protocol – PLC Error Code Tables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .A–7 DirectLOGIC – DirectNET PLC Error Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .A–14 Mitsubishi FX Protocol – PLC Error Codes . . . .

2nd Ed. please refer to Chapter 8: Troubleshooting for some troubleshooting tips or contact our technical support group at 770-844-4200. Rev. As with any network communications. the error message will appear across the top of the display screen as shown in the example below. The C-more Micro-Graphic panel also monitors any errors that are generated by the PLC that is connected to it. If you have difficulty determining the cause of the error. errors may occur. or other related data exchange error does occur. How the hexadecimal error code value is interpreted is slightly different between manufacturers. An explanation of how the specific PLC error is identified in the panel error code P499 is shown preceeding the specific manufacturer’s PLC error tables. If any of the PLC generated errors are detected.Appendix A: Panel & PLC Error Code Tables A 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 A B C D Introduction The C-more® Micro-Graphic panels are capable of communicating over RS232. CLICK PLC’s. If a C-more MicroGraphic panel communications error. C-more Micro-Graphic Panel Error Example P001: PLC COM Time Out Start Stop A–2 ® EA1-TCL-M Hardware User Manual. Do-more PLC’s. and the possible causes of the error follows. 07/13 . we have provided tables listing these errors. they are displayed across the top of the panel’s display embedded as a hexadecimal value in error code P499. To simplify identification of the possible cause of the error. and certain 3rd party PLCs. refer to the PLC manufacturers documentation for further explanation. all controllers in the Direct LOGIC family of PLCs utilizing various protocols. Since these errors are generated by the PLC. with their respective error codes. A. RS422 and RS485 serial networks. error messages. They communicate with Productivity Series PAC’s. see the PLC Drivers table in Chapter 6: PLC Communications. For a complete list of the supported PLCs and protocols. so it is important to check the explanation at the beginning of each manufacturer’s tables. A complete table of the panel generated errors.

Appendix A: Panel & PLC Error Code Tables C-more Micro-Graphic Panel Error Code Table The following table includes all of the error codes and error messages that the panel will display if the listed cause is detected.Range Parity Error Can’tOpenS. then an enquiry (ENQ) control code error will be displayed. C-more Micro-Graphic Panel Error Table Error Code P001 P002 P003 P004 P005 P006 P007 P008 P009 P010 P011 P012 P013 P014 P015 P016 P017 P019 P020 P021 P022 P023 P024 P025 P026 P027 P028 Error Message PLC Com Time Out NAK Received EOT Received STX is Not Found ETX/ETB NotFound LRC Not Match CRC Not Match Address NotMatch Re. Time Out Memory Error No Response Cause A timeout occurred after sending a request to the PLC. There was an invalid command sent to the PLC that wasn’t recognized by the PLC. PollingListErr. Parity error occurred. there is no match to what was requested.FUN. 07/13 A–3 . There is an invalid value in the function code. A. The address value returned in the data packet from the PLC is incorrect.Val. If the data packet does not include a negative acknowledgement (NAK . There are an incorrect number of bytes found in the data packet returned from the PLC.Err Out of Add.Code INVALID COMMAND ENQ Received TransID NotMatch Device Not Found DataByte Com. The touch panel requested a file number larger than 255. ® EA1-TCL-M Hardware User Manual. There was an incorrect Cyclic Redundancy Check (CRC) control code in the communications packet received from the PLC. The function code returned in the data packet from the PLC is incorrect. This error will be displayed if after checking the Transaction ID Byte in the data packet. An end of transmission has been sent by PLC in response to a read/write/setbit request. Be aware that not all of the panel errors are used with each type of PLC that can be connected to the panel.Code DataSizeNotMatch INV. A negative acknowledgement (NAK) control code has been generated during a read/write request. There was an incorrect Longitudinal Redundancy Check (LRC) control code in the communications packet received from the PLC. Can’t open serial port PLC Number does not match Unable to reset the Data Communications Bit Cable not connected properly Cannot detect other devices Panel not in polling list PLC Connection Time Out Memory Type Incorrect PLC failed to Respond: %PLC Node#%?? A 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 A B C D C-more Micro-Graphic Panel Error Code Table continues on the next page. This is an indication that the data in the packet is corrupted. Rev.Port PLC# Not Match Can’t Reset DCB Not Connected No Other Dev. This is an indication that the data in the packet is corrupted. PLC Conn. All of these errors involve problems that could result with the panel communicating with the connected PLC.0x15 value) in the defined packet field. The data part of the packet received contains 0 bytes of data. Neither an End of Text (ETX) nor an End of Transmission Block (ETB) control code was found in the data packet received from the PLC. A Start of Text (STX) control code was not found in the data packet received from the PLC. 2nd Ed.INV. A PLC device designated as Device could not be found.FUN.

Modbus (Koyo) 9 Modicon Modbus RTU Entivity Modbus RTU 10 Note: The following errors can be generated from the designated PLC. since the Modbus protocol is unaware of the significance of any particular value of any particular register. 0x0001 0x0002 0x0003 0x0004 The function code received in the query is not an allowable action for the server (or slave). 98. such as that the implied ILLEGAL DATA indicates length is incorrect. Request to inaccessible memory from the HMI layer to the PLC protocol layer. 07/13 . This a fault in the structure of the remainder of a complex request. the combination of reference number and transfer length is invalid.This error is an indication that there is a problem in the HMI layer or the PLC protocol layer. SLAVE DEVICE An unrecoverable error occurred while the server (or slave) was attempting to perform the FAILURE requested action. There was an error while allocating memory for the read buffer. a RD. The data address received in the query is not an allowable address for the server (or slave). ADDRESS then the request will successfully operate (address-wise at least) on registers 96. ILLEGAL FUNCTION ® C-more Micro-Graphic Panel Error Code Table (cont’d) A–4 EA1-TCL-M Hardware User Manual. When this error is displayed. then the request will fail with Exception code 0x02 "Illegal Data Address" since it attempts to operate on registers 96. it indicates a Hardware Problem.FUN. If a request is submitted with a starting register of 96 and a quantity of registers of 5. 11 PLC Error Codes Modbus Protocols 12 Panel Error Code Name Meaning P499 Hex Value 13 14 A B C D P499* P500 P700 P701 P702 P703 ErrCode Received -> A PLC generated error code with a hexadecimal value of XXXX has been returned from the Recv . are monitored by the C-more MicroGraphic panel.Appendix A: Panel & PLC Error Code Tables (cont’d) A Error Code Error Message C-more Micro-Graphic Panel Error Table Cause 2 3 4 5 6 Protocols Error Code P499 Explanation 7 Modbus The following table lists the errors that can be generated by the Modbus protocols: AutomationDirect CLICK 8 AutomationDirect DirectLOGIC . It specifically does NOT mean that a data item submitted for storage in a VALUE register has a value outside the expectation of the application program.Code A Read/Write/SetBit request has been sent to an invalid memory area. Rev. and the last one as 99. ILLEGAL DATA If a request is submitted with a starting register address of 96 and a quantity of registers of 4. This may be because the function code is only applicable to newer devices and was not implemented in the unit selected.Err Code XXXX PLC. For a controller with 100 registers. More specifically. This error is an INV.MEM Full memory leak may have occurred. If this error shows on the Panel. * See the explanation for error code P499 proceeding each set of PLC error code tables. Data cannot be written to the Serial port. WRT. 98. It could also indicate that the server (or slave) is in the wrong state to process a request of this type. if active.Buff. 99. 97. and there is no register with address 100.ReadOnly A PLC Write request was made to the PLC’s Read-Only memory area. the PDU addresses the first register as 0. 99 and 100. and displayed on the panel’s screen as a hexadecimal value in panel error code P499. 2nd Ed. A value contained in the query data field is not an allowable value for server (or slave). for example because it is unconfigured and is being asked to return registered values. Can'tWriteS.PLC. 97. INV.PLC Address indication that there is a problem in the HMI layer.Port Data was sent to the PLC via the Serial Port. A. This error is an indication that there is a problem in the HMI layer.

since the Modbus protocol is unaware of the significance of any particular value of any particular register. The project file in the Productivity3000 system and the imported CSV into C-more Micro Graphic must be in sync with each other. It could also indicate that the server (or slave) is in the wrong state to process a request of this type. A. PLC Error Codes for Productivity3000 Panel Error Code P499 Hex Value 0x0001 Meaning The function code received in the query is not an allowable action for the server (or slave). 0x0002 0x0003 0x0004 A 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 A B C D ® EA1-TCL-M Hardware User Manual. This may be because the function code is only applicable to newer devices and was not implemented in the unit selected. A value contained in the query data field is not an allowable value for the server (or slave). 2nd Ed. for example because it is unconfigured and is being asked to return registered values. It specifically does NOT mean that a data item submitted for storage in a register has a value outside the expectation of the application program. if active. 07/13 A–5 . Check to make sure that the C-more Micro Graphic tag and System ID match the Productivity3000 Programming Software Tag Name and System ID. Please refer to the PLC manufacturer’s documentation for additional information. This indicates a fault in the structure of the remainder of a complex request. An unrecoverable error occurred while the server (or slave) was attempting to perform the requested action. Rev. such as that the implied length is incorrect.Appendix A: Panel & PLC Error Code Tables Productivity3000 Error Code P499 Explanation Note: The following errors can be generated from the designated PLC. and displayed on the touch panel’s screen as a hexadecimal value in panel error code PLC-499 message. Address out of range. are monitored by the C-more touch panel.

In some Mode Change Active Occurs cases it takes several scans for a mode change. Occurs when permission level is not sufficient for the operation performed by the panel. Update Active Invalid Mode Ensure that the switch on the CPU is in Term mode. check cabling. Ensure that address range is expanded and load configuration to the CPU. Usually occurs when the module has gone bad. Occurs when attempting to read driver data from a driver that doesn't exist. when a PLC mode change is attempted while a mode change is in progress. Could occur from noise or faulty wiring. This allows the customer Inhibited to use the program to prevent the project from being updated. Mode Locked Occurs when mode change is attempted and keyswitch is not in Term. Occurs when someone attempts to access the documentation file while it is being written back to ROM. routing and switches for bad packets. Invalid Password Resource Locked Doc Update Active Invalid Driver Invalid Driver Data Shared RAM write failed Enter Do-more password in Password field of C-more Micro Panel Manager for this device. Program Update Active Wait until program update is complete. if active. A–6 ® EA1-TCL-M Hardware User Manual. are monitored by the C-more MicroGraphic panel. Rev. Invalid Argument Occurs when message cannot be parsed correctly. Out of Sessions Too many devices connected to the CPU. Force must be removed in order to update the tag. If versions are correct.Appendix A: Panel & PLC Error Code Tables A 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 A B C D Do-more Error Code P499 Explanation Note: The following errors can be generated from the designated PLC. Check Unknown Command versions and update appropriately. and displayed on the panel’s screen as a hexadecimal value in panel error code P499. Out of Range Invalid address exists. System Configuration Wait until System Configuration update is complete to continue communications. 07/13 . Reduce the number of devices connected. PLC Errors for Do-more Error Code 0x01 0x02 0x03 0x04 0x05 0x06 0x07 0x08 0x09 0x0A 0x0B 0x0C 0x0D 0x0E 0x0F 0x010 0x011 0x012 0x013 Description Resolution Occurs when a message has been corrupted or protocol version is mismatched. A. Occurs when client attempts to update the project without first acquiring the program update No Token token. Illegal Operation Increase the permission level to correct the problem. 2nd Ed. Program Update Occurs when client attempts to update the project while ST21 is true. Session number does match for sending device. Occurs when trying to update a tag that is forced. Re-establish connection by power cycling or Invalid Session sending updated project. Occurs when attempting to read a driver data type that isn't valid. Occurs when attempting to read or write to a module's shared RAM and it fails.

This value can be found in the specific PLC’s error tables to determine the cause of the error. if active. Note: The following errors can be generated from the designated PLC. Error in key mode. Direct LOGIC PLC Error Code Displayed Example: P499: Recv. PLC Error Codes for Direct LOGIC – K-Sequence Panel Error Code P499 Hex Value 01F8 020D 021C Error setting value. A 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 A B C D ® EA1-TCL-M Hardware User Manual. Please refer to the PLC users manual for additional information. Password protected. 07/13 A–7 . The possible PLC generated error codes for the various Direct LOGIC communication protocols breakdown into a four digit hexadecimal value. The P499 error message includes a four digit hexadecimal value displayed at the end of the message. Rev. A. Err Code 0002 Start Stop DirectLOGIC – K-Sequence PLC Error Code Table The following table lists the errors that can be generated by the DirectLOGIC PLC when using the K-Sequence protocol. and displayed on the panel’s screen as a hexadecimal value in panel error code P499. 2nd Ed. are monitored by the C-more MicroGraphic panel.Appendix A: Panel & PLC Error Code Tables DirectLOGIC Error Code P499 Explanation The P499 error code is used to show any errors that are generated by the connected PLC. Description DirectLOGIC – DirectNET PLC Error Codes There are no PLC generated errors that occur when using the DirectNET protocol.

The P499 error message includes a four digit hexadecimal value displayed at the end of the message. The possible PLC generated error codes for the Allen-Bradley DF1 and DH485 communication protocol is represented by a hexadecimal value as shown in the following diagram. AB DF1 Protocol Error Code P499 Breakdown Remote 4-7 bits Local 0-3 bits EXT STS byte AB DF1 Protocol – Multiple Error Code Examples Example 1 Remote 4-7 bits F x + Local 0-3 bits EXT STS byte x 0 x + x x x x Example 2 1 x + x 1 x + x x x x Example 3 F x + x 1 x + x x x x 16-bit Word 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 1 1 1 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 P499 Error Code Message Displayed Hexadecimal Value F 0 1 7 Example of an EXT STS error for a “Type mismatch. It is possible for more than one type of PLC error to be displayed in this value. A. The remote node specified does not ACK Command EXT STS = 0000 = None Remote 4-7 bits Local 0-3 bits EXT STS byte Error P499 Value Displayed 3 x x 3 x + 2 + x = 2 0 0 0 0 x x x x P499: Recv. Err Code F017 Start Stop A–8 ® EA1-TCL-M Hardware User Manual. Err Code 3200 Remote = 0x3000 = Remote node host is missing. Rev. Local .” hex x 0 9 = x 0 0 = x 0 9 = Error P499 Value Displayed F 0 0 9 1 1 0 0 F 1 0 9 Allen-Bradley PLC Error Code Displayed Example Error Recieved = P499: Recv.Appendix A: Panel & PLC Error Code Tables A 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 A B C D Allen-Bradley Error Code P499 Explanation The P499 error code is used to show any errors that are generated by the connected PLC. 07/13 . This value can be looked up in the specific PLC’s error tables to determine the cause of the error. disconnected or shut down.0x0200 = Cannot Guarantee Delivery. Link Layer. 2nd Ed. Please note that the error code is broken down into three sections.

07/13 A–9 . /04. 1400 & 1500. Illegal command or format. Hardware fault. Compatibility mode file missing or communication zone problem.) Duplicate token holder detected. CompactLogix and FlexLogix. are monitored by the C-more MicroGraphic panel. Host could not complete function due to hardware fault. PLC generated error code for the Allen-Bradley DF1 Protocol continue on the next page. Host has a problem and will not communicate. See the error code table on the next page. Station is offline. Function not allowed due to command protection selection. (The remote node specified does not ACK command. ControlLogix. Wait ACK (1775 KA buffer full). if active. Local port is disconnected. Processor is in Program Mode. A. Rev. 1200. not used not used Error code in the EXT STS byte. 2nd Ed. PLC Errors for Allen-Bradley DF1 Protocol. This includes full and half duplex communications for the MicroLogix 1000. A 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 A B C D ® EA1-TCL-M Hardware User Manual. link layer. 1100. and displayed on the panel’s screen as a hexadecimal value in panel error code P499. DST node is out of buffer space. Wait ACK (1775 KA buffer full). Cannot guarantee delivery. Remote node host is missing. Local STS Errors (0-3 bits) Panel Error Code P499 Hex Value 0x0 0x1 0x2 0x3 0x4 0x5 0x6 0x7 0x8 Description Success. and full duplex communications for the PLC5.Appendix A: Panel & PLC Error Code Tables Allen-Bradley DF1 Protocol – PLC Error Code Tables The following PLC error tables cover possible errors that are detected by the panel from AllenBradley PLCs using the DF1 protocol. no error. or shut down. /05. no error. disconnected. PLC Errors for Allen-Bradley DF1 Protocol. Remote node problem due to download. Application layer timed out waiting for response. SLC 5/03. Addressing problem or memory protect rungs. Note: The following errors can be generated from the designated PLC. Remote STS Errors (4-7 bits) Panel Error Code P499 Hex Value 0x0 0x10 0x20 0x30 0x40 0x50 0x60 0x70 0x80 0x90 0xA0 0xB0 0xC0 0xD0 0xE0 0xF0 Description Success. Please refer to the PLC users manual for additional information. Remote node cannot buffer command. Duplicate node detected.

situation has changed since start of the command. Symbol is of improper format. Invalid parameter or invalid data. File is wrong size. Command cannot be executed. Type mismatch. Illegal data type. A–10 ® EA1-TCL-M Hardware User Manual. another node owns it.Appendix A: Panel & PLC Error Code Tables Allen-Bradley DF1 Protocol – PLC Error Code Tables (cont’d) A 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 A B C D PLC Errors for Allen-Bradley DF1 Protocol. Data conversion error. Histogram overflow. 2nd Ed. Rev. Condition already exists. Scanner not able to communicate with 1771 rack adapter. File is open. Transaction size plus word address is too large. 07/13 . Access denied. Temporary internal problem. Duplicated label. Symbol not found. 1771 module response was not valid. EXT STS Command Code for F0 Command Panel Error Code P499 Hex Value 0x0 0x1 0x2 0x3 0x4 0x5 0x6 0x7 0x8 0x9 0xA 0xB 0xC 0xD 0xE 0xF 0x10 0x11 0x12 0x13 0x14 0x15 0x16 0x17 0x18 0x19 0x22 0x23 0x24 0x1A 0x1B 0x1C 0x1D 0x1E 0x1F Description not used A field has an illegal value. improper privilege. resource is readily available. Command execution failure for unknown reason. Fewer levels specified in address than minimum for any address. Condition cannot be generated. Timeout. Reserved Reserved Data table element protection violation. possible PLC 3 histogram overflow. A. Another node is the program owner. Address does not point to something usable. Address reference exists to deleted area. Unknown error. Data or file size is too large. resource is not available. No access. More levels specified in address than system supports. Cannot complete request. Remote rack fault.

Function not allowed due to command protection selection. no error. 2nd Ed. Rev. A 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 A B C D ® EA1-TCL-M Hardware User Manual. A. PLC Errors for Allen-Bradley DH485 Protocol. Local port is disconnected. Processor is in Program Mode. Cannot guarantee delivery. Note: The following errors can be generated from the designated PLC. Compatibility mode file missing or communication zone problem. Remote node cannot buffer command. Application layer timed out waiting for response. Please refer to the PLC users manual for additional information. or shut down. no error. Remote node problem due to download. and any communication connection using an Allen-Bradley AIC device using the DH485 protocol. are monitored by the C-more MicroGraphic panel. Duplicate node detected. See the error code table on the next page. DST node is out of buffer space. if active. Wait ACK (1775 KA buffer full). and displayed on the panel’s screen as a hexadecimal value in panel error code P499. not used not used Error code in the EXT STS byte. Host has a problem and will not communicate. (The remote node specified does not ACK command. 07/13 A–11 . Addressing problem or memory protect rungs. Hardware fault. link layer. Wait ACK (1775 KA buffer full). Host could not complete function due to hardware fault. Remote STS Errors (4-7 bits) Panel Error Code P499 Hex Value 0x0 0x10 0x20 0x30 0x40 0x50 0x60 0x70 0x80 0x90 0xA0 0xB0 0xC0 0xD0 0xE0 0xF0 Description Success. Remote node host is missing.) Duplicate token holder detected. Station is offline. disconnected.Appendix A: Panel & PLC Error Code Tables Allen-Bradley DH485 Protocol – PLC Error Code Tables The following PLC error code tables cover possible errors that are detected by the panel from Allen-Bradley PLCs using the DH485 protocol. Illegal command or format. Local STS Errors (0-3 bits) Panel Error Code P499 Hex Value 0x0 0x1 0x2 0x3 0x4 0x5 0x6 0x7 0x8 Description Success. PLC generated error codes for the Allen-Bradley DH485 protocol continue on the next page. This includes all MicroLogix and SLC500 PLCs. PLC Errors for Allen-Bradley DH485 Protocol.

07/13 .Appendix A: Panel & PLC Error Code Tables A 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 A B C D Allen-Bradley DH485 Protocol – PLC Error Code Tables (cont’d) PLC Errors for Allen-Bradley DH485 Protocol. privilege violation. Duplicate label. File open by another node + owner's local node address. Invalid parameter. 1 byte. Program owned by another node + program owner's local node address. 2nd Ed. A. EXT STS Command Code for F0 Command Panel Error Code P499 Hex Value 0x7 0xB 0xC 0xE 0x12 0x14 0x19 0x1A 0x1B Description Insufficient memory module size (0000h is returned). 1 byte. Resource not available or cannot do. Access denied. Rev. CMD cannot be executed. Failure during processing. A–12 ® EA1-TCL-M Hardware User Manual.

The possible PLC generated error codes for the GE 90-30. Rev. This value can be looked up in the specific PLC’s error tables to determine the cause of the error.Appendix A: Panel & PLC Error Code Tables GE Error Code P499 Explanation The P499 error code is used to show any errors that are generated by the connected PLC. The P499 error message includes a four digit hexadecimal value displayed at the end of the message. GE Error Code P499 Message Example: P499: Recv. A. 07/13 A–13 . 2nd Ed. Micro 90 and VersaMax Micro SNPX communication protocols breakdown into a four digit hexadecimal value. 90-70. Err Code 020C Start Stop A 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 A B C D ® EA1-TCL-M Hardware User Manual.

The minor error code contains the specific error code. 90-70 and VersaMax SNPX protocol continue on the next page. An error occurred within the SNP task in the CMM module in this PLC. The CPU has received a message that is out of order. Illegal Service Request. 2nd Ed. Note: The following errors can be generated from the designated PLC. Please refer to the PLC users manual for additional information. A. An error occurred within the SNPX task in the remote slave device. Rev.) Insufficient Privilege. A–14 ® EA1-TCL-M Hardware User Manual. (Series 90-70 PLC CPUs only) PLC generated error codes for the GE 90-30. It is recommended that the master wait a minimum of 10 msec before sending another service request. Port configurator error. SNP-X slave error. (Series 90-70 PLC CPUs only) Slave SNP task timed out before receiving an SRP response. The minor error code contains the specific error code. to avoid confusion with the normal successful COMMREQ completion. The PLC CPU’s Service Request Queue is full. An error occurred within the SNP slave task in the CMM module in the remote PLC. Problem with sending mail to the slave Service Request task. 90-70 and VersaMax PLC when using the SNPX protocol.Appendix A: Panel & PLC Error Code Tables A 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 A B C D GE SNPX Protocol – PLC Error Code Tables The following table lists the errors that can be generated by the GE 90-30. Autodial Error. The minor error code contains the specific error code. Service Request Error. The minor error code contains the specific error code. The master should retry later. Remote SNP Error. (This value is returned in lieu of the actual 01h value passed in the SNP error message. the minor error code contains the privilege level required for the service request. 07/13 . if active. The requested service is either not defined or not supported. (Series 90-70 PLC CPUs only) Problem with getting mail from the slave Service Request task. (Series 90-70 PLC CPUs only) Slave SNP task encountered an error in trying to write the datagram. Illegal Mailbox Type.) Local SNP/SNP-X Error. Service request mailbox type is either undefined or unexpected. This error may occur in either an SNP master or an SNP slave. SNP DOS Driver Error. (Series 90-70 PLC CPUs only) Slave SNP task could not find the requested datagram connection. PLC Errors for GE SNPX Protocol (Major) Panel Error Code P499 Hex Value No error 0x0002 0x0004 0x0005 0x0006 0x0007 0x000A 0x000B 0x000C 0x000D 0x000E 0x000F 0x0013 0x0050 0x0051 0x0055 0x0056 0x0057 0x0058 Description Successful completion. (This is the expected completion value in the COMMREQ Status Word. An error occurred while attempting to send a command string to an attached external modem. Protocol Sequence Error. the minor error code contains the specific error code. The minor error code contains the specific error code. and displayed on the panel’s screen as a hexadecimal value in panel error code P499. For Series 90-70 PLC. are monitored by the C-more MicroGraphic panel. (Series 90-70 PLC CPUs only) Slave SNP task encountered an error in trying to update the datagram.

Password protection at PLC CPU may be preventing the requested service. Not used The service request code in an X-Request message is unsupported or invalid at this time. The modem command string length exceeds 250 characters. (May be due to missing CTS signal when the CMM is configured to use hardware flow control. The master should try again later. These errors are only generated when there is no protocol currently being run on a port. Queue Full indication from Service Request Processor in slave PLC CPU. COMMREQ Data Block Length is too small. A. must use NOW AIT-type. the length of the data within the buffer message is always the message length. It is recommended that the master wait at least 10 msec before repeating the X-Request. This error may occur if an SNP-X communication session has not been success fully established at the slave device. Must initiate a new SNP communication by sending an Attach or Long Attach COMMREQ. Check the local and remote modems and the telephone line. Invalid slave memory type in X-Request message. Output command string data is missing or incomplete. Invalid COMMREQ length. Modem is unable to complete the requested connection. 07/13 A–15 . Data length must be non-zero. Invalid COMMREQ status word location. 2nd Ed. and the port receives a COMMREQ. (The port may be disabled or an error has occurred in processing a new configuration). Invalid COMMREQ data. SNP communication is not active. Modem responded with NO CARRIER. A 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 A B C D ® EA1-TCL-M Hardware User Manual.) Invalid slave memory address or range in X-Request message. Response was not received from modem. X-Buffer data length does not match the service request in X-Request message. The remote modem is already in use. Insufficient privilege level in the slave PLC CPU for the requested SNP-X service. Unsupported COMMREQ.Appendix A: Panel & PLC Error Code Tables GE SNPX Protocol– PLC Error Code Tables (cont’d) PLC Errors for GE SNPX Protocol (Minor-Major) (cont’d) Panel Error Code P499 Hex Value PLC Error 0x010C PLC Error 0x010E PLC Error 0x010F PLC Error 0x020C PLC Error 0x020E PLC Error 0x020F PLC Error 0x0213 PLC Error 0x030C PLC Error 0x030E PLC Error 0x030F PLC Error 0x0313 PLC Error 0x040C PLC Error 0x040E PLC Error 0x040F PLC Error 0x0413 PLC Error 0x050C PLC Error 0x050E PLC Error 0x050F PLC Error 0x0513 PLC Error 0x060C PLC Error 0x060E PLC Error 0x060F PLC Error 0x070C PLC Error 0x070E Description WAIT-type COMMREQ is not permitted. SNP slave did not respond to Attach message from master. Modem responded with BUSY. The X-Buffer message length is obtained from the Next Message Length field in the X-Request message. Master device memory address or length is zero. retry the connection request at a later time. The slave is temporarily unable to complete the service request. PLC Error 0x070F PLC generated error codes for the GE 90-30. The CMM module was unable to transmit the modem autodial output from the serial port. Serial output timeout. Invalid data length in X-Request message. and may not exceed decimal 1000 bytes. Unable to write SNP Status Word to local PLC memory. Check modem and cable. COMMREQ command is not supported. 90-70 and VersaMax SNPX protocol continued on the next page. Modem is unable to complete the requested connection. Rev. Master device memory type is not valid in this PLC. may be due to invalid Status Word memory type or address.

the unexpected SRP error code is saved in the Diagnostic Status Words in the CMM module. An improper length may cause other minor error codes 6-11. (This error applies to CMM module only. Modem is unable to complete the requested command. A.) Invalid Fault Table starting index. SNP message exchange may have taken place. Slave device memory address is missing or zero. Usually caused by invalid memory address for this PLC. Invalid slave PLC type. 2nd Ed. Modem is unable to complete the requested command. Invalid datagram point format data. Missing or too many datagram point formats. Must be 1-32 for I/O Fault Table. 90-70 and VersaMax SNPX protocol continue on the next page. Rev. Must be 0 for Series 90-70. Service Request Processor response exceeds 1000 bytes. or day-of-week value. Must be 1-32. Check the modem command string and modem. Must be 01h for normal datagram. Invalid Set PLC Date/Time mode. or 81h (129) for permanent datagram. PLC generated error codes for the GE 90-30. Must be an even value from 42 to 2048. or 2 for PLC Fault Table.Appendix A: Panel & PLC Error Code Tables A 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 A B C D GE SNPX Protocol– PLC Error Code Tables (cont’d) PLC Errors for GE SNPX Protocol (Minor-Major) (cont’d) Panel Error Code P499 Hex Value 0x080C 0x080E 0x080F 0x090C 0x090E 0x0A0C 0x0A0E 0x0B0C 0x0B0E 0x0C0C 0x0D0C 0x0E0C 0x0F0C 0x100C 0x100F 0x110C 0x120C 0x130C 0x140C 0x150C 0x150F 0x160C 0x170C 0x180C 0x190C Description Unable to read or write master device memory locations specified in COMMREQ. 07/13 . (When expected COMMREQ length is 6 words or less. Modem responded with NO DIALTONE. time. Must be 0 through 4 or -1. Modem responded with RING. Modem is unable to complete the requested connection. Modem is unable to complete the requested command. The modem response is expected to be either CONNECT or OK. Check the modem connections and the telephone line. Must be 1-4. Use multiple COMMREQs if total data length exceeds this maximum value. (This error applies to CMM module only. Requested service is not permitted in a Broadcast request. Must use a smaller data length. Invalid maximum SNP message data size.) Invalid Diagnostic Status Word (DSW) starting word or length. the SNP-X slave device cannot return the data in an X-Response message. A–16 ® EA1-TCL-M Hardware User Manual. An unknown response was received from the modem. or 1 for Series 90-30 or Series 90-20. Slave device memory type is missing or not valid. Retry the modem command at a later time. Invalid Privilege Level. Invalid Fault Table selector. Check the modem command string and modem. or 1-16 for PLC.) Master device memory data length exceeds maximum data size of CMM module (2048 bytes). Unexpected Service Request Processor error. indicating that the modem is being called by another modem. Modem responded with ERROR. Must be 1 for I/O Fault Table. Invalid fault count. Invalid Set PLC Date/Time date. Unable to retrieve master device PLC time/date from PLC CPU. or 1-16 for PLC Fault Table. The master must direct the X-Request message to a specific SNP-X slave device. Must be 1-32 for I/O Fault Table. Invalid datagram type. COMMREQ Data Block Length is too small.

Attach Response.Appendix A: Panel & PLC Error Code Tables GE SNPX Protocol– PLC Error Code Tables (cont’d) PLC Errors for GE SNPX Protocol (Minor-Major) (cont’d) Panel Error Code P499 Hex Value 0x1A0C 0x1B0C 0x1C0C 0x1D0C 0x1E0C 0x1F0C 0x200C 0x200F 0x210C Description Datagram area size is too small to include data for all specified point formats. A. Communications have not been established. or Update Realtime Datagram message. An invalid SNP message type was received when an Attach.)). and the Next Message Length must specify the length of the X-Buffer message. Since an X-Buffer message is never followed by another message. Communications have not been established. the Next Message Type must be zero. the Next Message Type must always be zero. A maximum of two retries are permitted. Communications have not been established. The Broadcast SNP ID is not permitted in a single-slave SNP-X session. The message type of an X-Request message must be 58h = ’X’. Inactivity timeout (T3’). A Parity error has occurred on an Attach. The NAKed message may be retransmitted a maximum of two times. Use multiple COMMREQs if necessary. 2nd Ed. or 1 for multiple slave devices. Must be 1-8. Attach Response. Communications have not been established. Attach Response. or Update Realtime Datagram was required. Invalid number of Control Program Names. or Update Real–time Datagram message. or Update Realtime Datagram message. plus a terminating null character (00h). The Null SNP ID (eight bytes of 00h) may be used to specify any single device. Invalid Message Type field in a received X-Request message. Invalid Message Type field in a received X-Buffer message. Invalid Next Message Type field in a received X-Buffer message. The Broadcast SNP ID (eight bytes of FFh) may be use to specify all slave devices on the serial link. The message type of an X-Buffer message must be 54h = ’T’. 07/13 A–17 . Destination SNP ID does not match SNP-X session type. or Update Realtime Datagram message. Invalid Next Message Type or Next Message Length field in a received X Request message. A received SNP message has been NAKed the maximum number of two times. Attach Response. If this request does not use a buffer (0-2 bytes of data). A 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 A B C D ® EA1-TCL-M Hardware User Manual. Communications have not been established. Must be 0-7 ASCII characters. Another Break was received while SNP slave was waiting for an Attach or Update Realtime Datagram message. 90-70 and VersaMax SNPX protocol continue on the next page. An unexpected SNP message type was received when an Attach. the Next Message Type must be 54h = ’T’. or Update Realtime Datagram message was required. Attach Response. Communications have not been established. Attach Response. A retry is caused by a NAK from from the remote SNP device. An SNP message has been sent and retried the maximum number of times. If this request will be followed with a buffer message (more than 2 byte. Must use a smaller data length. A Framing or Overrun serial error has occurred on an Attach. Must be 0 for a single slave device. Rev. Valid X-Buffer message lengths are 9-1008 bytes (data length plus 8 bytes). SNP-X Request exceeds maximum data size (1000 bytes). 0x210F 0x220C 0x220F 0x230C 0x230F 0x240C 0x250C 0x260C 0x270C 0x280C 0x290C PLC generated error codes for the GE 90-30. An invalid next message length value was specified in an Attach. Illegal destination SNP ID specified for SNP-X slave. Invalid SNP-X communication session type. The Null SNP ID is not permitted in a multiple-slave SNP-X session. The SNP slave has not received any new SNP messages within the configured T3’ time interval. A BCC (Block Check Code) error has occurred on an Attach.

(May be due to missing CTS signal when the CMM module is configured to use hardware flow control. an SNP message.) SNP-X Response message exceeds maximum data size (decimal 1000 bytes). An expected Text Buffer or Connection Data message was not received within the configured T5’’ time interval. PLC backplane communications error Invalid Piggyback Status data memory type or address. 2nd Ed. A. Communications have not been established. Sequence Error. A–18 ® EA1-TCL-M Hardware User Manual. Response timeout. Invalid SNP Slave SNP ID. Serial output timeout. An unexpected SNP message type was received. Received SNP message contains bad next message length value. The slave was unable to transmit an SNP-X message from the serial port.) SNP slave did not receive a response from the Service Request Processor in the PLC CPU. (May be due to missing CTS signal when the CMM module is configured to use hardware flow control. Rev. The Null SNP ID (eight bytes of 00h) may be used to specify any single slave device. Must be a 0-7 ASCII characters. An SNP Request or Response was aborted prior to completion due to reception of a Break. May occur when Series 90-70 commands (Task Memory or Program Block Memory Read/Write) are issued to a Series 90-30 slave device. COMMREQ timeout. The SNP Master did not receive an SNP Response message within the configured T5’ time interval. plus a terminating null character (00h). Communications have not been established.Appendix A: Panel & PLC Error Code Tables A 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 A B C D GE SNPX Protocol– PLC Error Code Tables (cont’d) PLC Errors for GE SNPX Protocol (Minor-Major) (cont’d) Panel Error Code P499 Hex Value 0x2A0C 0x2B0C 0x2C0C 0x2D0C 0x2E0C 0x2F0C 0x300C 0x310C 0x320C 0x330C 0x340C 0x350C 0x360C 0x370C 0x380C 0x390C 0x400C 0x400D 0x400F Description An unknown message was received when an acknowledge (ACK or NAK) was required.) PLC generated error codes for the GE Fanuc 90-30. Usually indicates a problem with the remote SNP slave device. or SNP acknowledge (ACK or NAK) from the serial port. A slave device may generate this error if the master device has aborted after maximum response NAKs and does not NAK the next response retry. The CMM module was unable to transmit a Break. Data in the Response is ignored. The COMMREQ did not complete within the configured time interval. Serial output timeout. (Response code must equal the request code +80h. An acknowledge (ACK or NAK) was not received within the configured T2 time interval. 90-70 and VersaMax SNPX protocol continue on the next page. A parity error has occurred on an X-Attach Response message when establishing a new SNP-X communication session. Response code in received SNP-X response message does not match expected value. Acknowledge timeout. Buffer message timeout. 07/13 . The SNP master has received a response message containing an unexpected data length. The requested service is not supported by the SNP slave.

Communications have not been established. An invalid message type was received when an X-Attach Response was required when establishing a new SNP-X communication session. PLC backplane communications error. The master has retried the X-Attach message twice without receiving a response. the datagram should be cancelled by using the Datagram ID returned by the COMMREQ. The SNP slave has rejected a request to change to a higher or lower privilege level. An expected X-Attach Response message was not received within the response timeout interval when establishing a new SNP-X communication session. Improper Write Datagram message format. Rev. The datagram has been partially established. 0x430D 0x430F 0x440C 0x440D 0x440F 0x450C 0x460C 0x500C 0x500F 0x510C 0x510F 0x520C 0x520F PLC generated error codes for the GE Fanuc 90-30.Appendix A: Panel & PLC Error Code Tables GE SNPX Protocol – PLC Error Code Tables (cont’d) PLC Errors for GE SNPX Protocol (Minor-Major) (cont’d) Panel Error Code P499 Hex Value 0x410C 0x410D 0x410F 0x420C 0x420D 0x420F 0x430C Description A framing or overrun error has occurred on an X-Attach Response message when establishing a new SNPX communication session. but is not usable. A BCC (Block Check Code) error has occurred in a received X-Attach message. An invalid next message type value was detected in an X-Attach Response message when establishing a new SNP-X communication session. 07/13 A–19 . Communications have not been established. Communications have not been established. A. The master must use the proper message format for this SNP slave device. A 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 A B C D ® EA1-TCL-M Hardware User Manual. A BCC (Block Check Code) error has occurred on an X-Attach Response message when establishing a new SNP-X communication session. (The SNP master in the CMMmodule sends this message as part of the Establish Datagram COMMREQ command. 90-70 and VersaMax SNPX protocol continue on the next page. 2nd Ed. A framing or overrun error has occurred in a received X-Attach message. A BCC (Block Check Code) error has occurred on an X-Attach Response message when re-establishing an existing SNP-X communication session. An X-Buffer message was received containing greater than 1000 bytes of data. SNP Request or Response message exceeds maximum data length of the CMM module. Use multiple requests if total data length exceeds the maximum value. An invalid response code was detected in an X-Attach Response message when establishing a new SNP-X communication session. A parity error has occurred in a received X-Attach message.) The SNP-X slave did not receive a response from the Service Request Processor in the PLC CPU. Communications have not been established. Series 90-70 slave devices use a different format for this message than Series 90-30 or Series 90-20 slave devices. A parity error has occurred on an X-Attach Response message when re-establishing an existing SNP-X communication session. Communications have not been established.) The master must use a smaller data length. (Total data length for Mailbox and all following Buffer messages is 2048 bytes. A datagram error occurred in a Series 90-70 slave device (dual-port error). SNP slave on CMM module requires PLC CPU privilege level 2 to operate. A framing or overrun error has occurred on an X-Attach Response message when re-establishing an existing SNP-X communication session. Communications have not been established. An SNP-X request was aborted prior to completion due to reception of a Break. Communications have not been established. Communications have not been established. Communications have not been established. The data is ignored.

A framing or overrun error has occurred on an Intermediate Response message. A parity error has occurred on an Intermediate Response message. An invalid next message type value was detected in an Intermediate Response message. An expected X-Attach Response message was not received within the response timeout interval when reestablishing an existing SNP-X communication session. PLC generated error codes for the GE Fanuc 90-30. A BCC (Block Check Code) error has occurred in a received X-Request message. 07/13 . the Next Message Length must be zero. A framing or overrun error has occurred in a received X-Request message. A BCC(Block Check Code) error has occurred in a received X-Buffer message. The master has retried the X-Attach message twice without receiving a response.) An invalid Next Message Type value was detected in an X-Attach Response message when re-establishing an existing SNP-X communication session. An invalid Message Type was received when an X-Attach message was required. the message type must be 58h = ’T’. An invalid next message type value was detected in an X-Response message. A parity error has occurred on an X-Response message. Communications have not been established. An invalid response code was detected in an Intermediate Response message. An invalid response code was detected in an X-Response message. 90-70 and VersaMax SNPX protocol continue on the next page. Communications have not been established. A. (For an X-Attach message. A BCC (Block Check Code) error has occurred on an X-Response message. A parity error has occurred in a received X-Request message. 2nd Ed. A–20 ® EA1-TCL-M Hardware User Manual. An invalid request code was detected in a received X-Attach message. Communications have not been established. A framing or overrun error has occurred on an X-Response message. An invalid message type was received when an X-Response message was required. (For an X-Attach message. Rev. A BCC (Block Check Code) error has occurred on an Intermediate Response message.) An invalid response code was detected in an X-Attach Response message when re-establishing an existing SNP-X communication session. A parity error has occurred in a received X-Buffer message. An invalid message type was received when an Intermediate Response message was required. An expected X-Response message was not received within the response time. An expected X-Buffer message was not received. Communications have not been established. An expected Intermediate Response message was not received within the response timeout interval.Appendix A: Panel & PLC Error Code Tables A 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 A B C D GE SNPX Protocol– PLC Error Code Tables (cont’d) PLC Errors for GE SNPX Protocol (Minor-Major) (cont’d) Panel Error Code P499 Hex Value 0x530C 0x530F 0x540C 0x540F 0x550C 0x550F 0x560C 0x600C 0x600F 0x610C 0x610F 0x620C 0x620F 0x630C 0x640C 0x650C 0x660C 0x700C 0x700F 0x710C 0x710F 0x720C 0x720F 0x730C 0x730F 0x740C 0x750C 0x760C Description An invalid message type was received when an X-Attach Response was required when re-establishing an existing SNP-X communication session. A framing or overrun error has occurred in a received X-Buffer message. An invalid Next Message Type value was detected in a received X-Attach message.

Invalid block state transition. No task–level Rack/Slot configuration to read or delete. ® A 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 A B C D EA1-TCL-M Hardware User Manual. or framing errors). no communication can take place. SNP message type received was not the type expected. Device is write–protected. Passwords are set to inactive and cannot be enabled or disabled. Either communication has been lost or a communication session has not been established. A comm or write verify error occurred during save or restore. Control Program (CP) tasks exist but requestor not logged into main CP. The OEM key is NULL (inactive). or later. Unable to find connection address. Bad SNP BCC encountered. 07/13 A–21 . Bad SNP communication. Packet size or total program size does not match input. Size of datagram connection invalid. Transmission was aborted after maximum retries due to a bad Block Check Code. Data stored on device has been corrupted and is no longer reliable. Point length not allowed. Verify with FA Card or EEPROM failed. Specified device is not available in the system (not present). User Program Module (UPM) read or write exceeded block end. Password(s) already enabled and can not be forced inactive. PLC generated error codes for the GE Fanuc 90-30. Invalid datagram type specified. Transmission was aborted after maximum retries due to serial errors (that is. Login using non–zero buffer size required for block commands. Attempt was made to read a device but no data has been stored on it. Rev. A. Out–of–Sequence SNP message. Total datagram connection memory exceeded. One or more PLC modules configured have unsupported revision.Appendix A: Panel & PLC Error Code Tables GE SNPX Protocol – PLC Error Code Tables (cont’d) PLC Errors for GE SNPX Protocol (Minor-Major) (cont’d) Panel Error Code P499 Hex Value 0x8D0A 0x8E0A 0x8F0A 0x900A 0x910A 0x920A 0xC105 0xC205 0xC305 0xC405 0xC505 0xC605 0xC705 0xC805 0xC905 0xCA05 0xCB05 0xCC05 0xCD05 0xCE05 0xCF05 0xD005 0xD105 0xD205 0xD305 0xD405 0xD505 0xD605 0xD705 0xD805 0xD905 0xDA05 0xDB05 0xDC05 0xDD05 0xDE05 0xDF05 Description Bad DOS Version. 90-70 and VersaMax SNPX protocol continue on the next page. Transfer type invalid for this Memory Type selector. Null pointer to data in Memory Type selector. Mismatch of configuration checksum. 2nd Ed. Text length does not match traffic type. Invalid Memory Type selector in datagram. Unable to locate given datagram connection ID. Invalid datagram connection address. Must have DOS 2. overrun. PC Serial port configured for SNP Master driver is not open. Invalid block name specified in datagram.0. Specified device has insufficient memory to handle request. parity. Invalid write mode parameter. No SNP communication. to support the SNP DOS Driver.

No I/O configuration to read or delete. A–22 ® EA1-TCL-M Hardware User Manual. No user memory is available to allocate. IOS could not delete configuration. Request only valid from programmer. I/O configuration mismatch. A. Cannot clear I/O configuration. I/O configuration is invalid. Memory Type selector not valid in context. Invalid sweep state to set. DOS file area not formatted. Invalid input parameter in request. Task unable to be created. 2nd Ed. Task address out of range. Programmer is already attached. CPU model number does not match. Invalid Task Name referenced. Unable to perform auto configuration. Memory Type for this selector does not exist. Required to log in to a task for service. Configuration is not valid. Task unable to be deleted. VME bus error encountered. or bad type. No privilege for attempted operation.Appendix A: Panel & PLC Error Code Tables A 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 A B C D GE SNPX Protocol– PLC Error Code Tables (cont’d) PLC Errors for GE SNPX Protocol (Minor-Major) (cont’d) Panel Error Code P499 Hex Value 0xE005 0xE105 0xE205 0xE305 0xE405 0xE505 0xE605 0xE705 0xE805 0xE905 0xEA05 0xEB05 0xEC05 0xED05 0xEE05 0xEF05 0xF005 0xF105 0xF205 0xF305 0xF405 0xF505 0xF605 0xF705 0xF805 0xF905 0xFA05 0xFB05 0xFC05 0xFD05 0xFE05 0xFF05 Description Service in process cannot login. Invalid password. Not logged in to process service request. CPU revision number does not match. Request only valid in stop mode. Invalid program cannot log in. Service Request Error has been aborted. Rev. Cannot replace I/O module. 07/13 . Could not return block sizes.

are monitored by the C-more MicroGraphic panel. CPU must be stopped. The requested data cannot be executed in the specified drive memory. Note: The following errors can be generated from the designated PLC. Request cannot be serviced while CPU is running. Address qualification is incorrect. and displayed on the panel’s screen as a hexadecimal value in panel error code P499. Specified range is out of File (ZR memory) range. Check the CPUs allowable data types. The specified data type does not exist. Please refer to the PLC users manual for additional information. Rev. The CPU may not allow this data type. A 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 A B C D ® EA1-TCL-M Hardware User Manual. Unsupported request sent to PLC. Drive memory does not exist. CPU must be stopped. Packet sent is too large according to size request in header. PLC Error Codes for Mitsubishi Q / QnA and Q Series Panel Error Code P499 Hex Value 0x4000 0x4001 0x4002 0x4003 0x4004 0x4005 0x4006 0x4008 0x4010 0x4013 0x4021 0x4022 0x4023 0x4024 0x4025 0x4026 0x4027 0x4028 0x4029 0x402A 0x402B 0x402C 0x4030 0x4031 0x4032 0x4033 0x4034 Description Serial communications checksum error. Mitsubishi Q / QnA Series – PLC Error Codes The following table lists the errors that can be generated by the Mitsubisht Q / QnA Series PLC when using the Q / QnA protocol. Request cannot be serviced while CPU is running. Check cable and grounding. CPU busy or buffer full. Also PLC. The data type requested may need to be expanded in GX developer. File (ZR memory) is locked by another device. there are no PLC generated errors. Specified File (ZR memory) is abnormal. File (ZR memory) password required. may still be booting up. File (ZR memory) inaccessible by user. Request cannot be executed because completion address for an instruction cannot be turned on. Specified File (ZR memory) capacity cannot be retrieved. Serial communications could not be initialized. The specified address is out of range. System protect switch is on and request was sent that cannot be executed. 07/13 A–23 .Appendix A: Panel & PLC Error Code Tables Mitsubishi FX Protocol – PLC Error Codes Only errors as listed in the C-more Micro-Graphic Panel Error Code Table shown on page A-3 can occur when using the Mitsubishi FX protocol. A. The requested operation cannot be executed presently. File (ZR memory) name and File (ZR memory) number do not match. Global request sent to PLC that cannot be executed. File (ZR memory) already exist. if active. Unsupported request sent to PLC. File (ZR memory) does not exist. 2nd Ed. PLC generated error codes for the Mitsubishi Q / QnA protocol continue on the next page. Cannot write to system area.

Station number specified does not exist.Appendix A: Panel & PLC Error Code Tables A 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 A B C D Mitsubishi Q / QnA Series – PLC Error Codes (cont’d) PLC Error Codes for Mitsubishi Q / QnA and Q Series Panel Error Code P499 Hex Value 0x4040 0x4041 0x4042 0x4043 0x4044 0x4050 0x4051 0x4052 0x4053 0x4080 0x4082 0x408B 0x40A0 0x40A1 0x40A2 0x40A3 0x40A4 0x40A5 0x40A6 0x4100 0x4101 0x4105 0x4106 0x4107 0x4110 0x4111 0x4A01 0x4A02 Description Module doesn't support request. A block number out of range was specified. 2nd Ed. Specified function not supported because CPU is in Stop. Module cannot be accessed. Wait until system is up before performing request. Specified memory cannot be accessed. Routing not supported in C-more. Specified request is already being executed. Hardware problem exist for specified module. Serial communication connection incorrect. Specified memory attribute is read only and cannot be written to. 07/13 . Wait until CPU is booted up. The number of blocks requested exceeds the range of the PLC. CPU is in initialization. A–24 ® EA1-TCL-M Hardware User Manual. Request is out of module's range. A. Check memory types for that CPU. Error occurred when writing to specified memory location. Request data error. The network number specified does not exist. A step number was specified out of range. Check cabling and electrical noise. Specified SFC device is out of range. CPU module internal memory fault. Rev. Specified sequence step number is out of range. CPU module hardware fault. Specified function not supported by this CPU. Step range limit exceeded. Address for specified module is incorrect. The remote request cannot be performed. Block specification and step specification are incorrect. Routing not supported in C-more. System is not up yet. Bad CPU. Put CPU in Run. Request cannot be executed because memory card protect switch is on.

The P499 error message includes a four digit hexadecimal value displayed at the end of the message. Err Code 0016 Start Stop A 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 A B C D ® EA1-TCL-M Hardware User Manual. A. The possible PLC generated error codes for the Omron Host Link communication protocols breakdown into a four digit hexadecimal value. Rev. 07/13 A–25 . Omron Error Code P499 Message Example: P499: Recv. 2nd Ed.Appendix A: Panel & PLC Error Code Tables Omron Error Code P499 Explanation The P499 error code is used to show any errors that are generated by the connected PLC. This value can be looked up in the specific PLC’s error tables to determine the cause of the error.

are monitored by the C-more MicroGraphic panel. Frame length error. Framing error. Abort due to overrun in transmit data under process. Entry number data error (parameter error. Not executable in RUN mode. Instruction not found. PLC Error Codes for Omron Host Link Panel Error Code P499 Hex Value 0x00 0x01 0x02 0x03 0x04 0x0B 0x0C 0x0D 0x10 0x11 0x12 0x13 0x14 0x15 0x16 0x18 0x19 0x20 0xA0 0xA1 0xA2 0xA3 0xA4 0xA5 0xA8 0xB0 Description Normal Completion. Abort due to framing error in transmit data under process. Abort due to FCS error in transmit data under process. Not executable (due to Un-executable error clear. Un-executable due to program area capacity other than 16k bytes. 2nd Ed. Please refer to the PLC manufacturer’s documentation for additional information.Appendix A: Panel & PLC Error Code Tables A 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 A B C D Omron Host Link Protocol – PLC Error Code Table The following table lists the errors that can be generated by the Omron PLC when using the Host Link protocol. Not executable in LOCAL mode. Abort due to format error in transmit data under process. Not executable in MONITOR mode. duplication of optical transmitting I/O unit). data length error). if active. non-registration of I/O table. Not executable in DEBUG mode. Parity error. A. Note: The following errors can be generated from the designated PLC. Abort due to entry number data error in transmit data under process. and displayed on the panel’s screen as a hexadecimal value in panel error code P499. I/O table generation impossible (unrecognized remote I/O unit. Format error (parameter length error). Rev. Abort due to parity error in transmit data under process. channel over. A–26 ® EA1-TCL-M Hardware User Manual. 07/13 . Address over (data overflow). FCS error. Overrun. etc. data code error. Not executable in PROGRAM mode. Not executable with PROM mounted. Abort due to frame length error in transmit data under process.).

Destination Node Error: Third Node missing. Service Canceled. A. and displayed on the panel’s screen as a hexadecimal value in panel error code P499. are monitored by the C-more MicroGraphic panel. Local Error: Too many send frames. Command Format Error: Elements/Data don't match. A 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 A B C D ® EA1-TCL-M Hardware User Manual. Local Error: Retries Failed. if active. Service Unsupported: Not supported by Model/Version. Destination Node Error: Unit Missing. Parameter Error: Address range error. Command Format Error: Command too short. Command Format Error: Header Error. Local Error: Node Address Duplication. Command Format Error: Command format error. Controller Error: Controller Error. Parameter Error: Access Size Error. Controller Error: Communications Controller Error. Please refer to the PLC manufacturer’s documentation for additional information. Service Unsupported: Undefined Command. Routing Table Error: Destination address setting error. Destination Node Error: Destination Node busy. Rev. Controller Error: CPU Unit Error.Appendix A: Panel & PLC Error Code Tables Omron FINS Protocol – PLC Error Code Table The following table lists the errors that can be generated by the Omron PLC when using the FINS protocol. Destination Node Error: Response Timeout. Local Error: Local node not in network. Command Format Error: Command too long. PLC generated error codes for the Omron FINS protocol continue on the next page. 2nd Ed. Routing Table Error: Routing table error. Parameter Error: Area classification missing. Destination Node Error: Destination Node not in network. Routing Table Error: No routing tables. PLC Error Codes for Omron FINS Panel Error Code P499 Hex Value 0x0000 0x0001 0x0101 0x0102 0x0103 0x0104 0x0105 0x0106 0x0201 0x0202 0x0203 0x0204 0x0205 0x0301 0x0302 0x0303 0x0304 0x0401 0x0402 0x0501 0x0502 0x0503 0x0504 0x1001 0x1002 0x1003 0x1004 0x1005 0x1101 0x1102 0x1103 Description Normal Completion. Routing Table Error: Too many delays. Local Error: Token Timeout. Controller Error: Unit number Error. 07/13 A–27 . Note: The following errors can be generated from the designated PLC. Local Error: Node address range error.

Write Not Possible: Read Only.Appendix A: Panel & PLC Error Code Tables A 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 A B C D Omron FINS Protocol – PLC Error Code Table (cont’d) PLC Error Codes for Omron FINS Panel Error Code P499 Hex Value 0x1104 0x1106 0x1109 0x110A 0x110B 0x110C 0x2002 0x2003 0x2004 0x2005 0x2006 0x2007 0x2101 0x2102 0x2103 0x2105 0x2106 0x2107 0x2108 0x2201 0x2202 0x2203 0x2204 0x2205 0x2206 0x2207 0x2208 0x2301 0x2302 0x2303 0x2401 0x2502 0x2503 0x2504 0x2505 0x2506 Description Parameter Error: Address range exceeded. Read Not Possible: Program missing. Not executable in current mode: Step cannot be executed. No such device: File device missing. Parameter Error: Response too long. Write Not Possible: Protected . Not executable in current mode: Wrong PLC mode (Monitor). Write Not Possible: Cannot register. Read Not Possible: Data mismatch. 07/13 . A–28 ® EA1-TCL-M Hardware User Manual. Rev. A. 2nd Ed.cannot write data link table. Parameter Error: Relational Error. Unit Error: Too many I/O points. Unit Error: Memory Error. No such device: Missing memory. Parameter Error: Parameter Error. Unit Error: CPU bus error. Read Not Possible: File missing. Unit Error: I/O Duplication. No such device: Clock missing. Write Not Possible: Program missing. Parameter Error: Duplicate Data Access. Not executable in current mode: Not possible while running. Read Not Possible: Data missing. Not executable in current mode: Specified node not polling node. Write Not Possible: File name already exists. Parameter Error: Program Missing. Cannot Start/Stop: Table missing. Read Not Possible: Table missing. PLC generated error codes for the Omron FINS protocol continue on the next page. Write Not Possible: Cannot change. Not executable in current mode: Wrong PLC mode (Debug). Write Not Possible: File missing. Not executable in current mode: Not possible during execution. Not executable in current mode: Wrong PLC mode (Run). Not executable in current mode: Wrong PLC mode (Program). Read Not Possible: Protected. Unit Error: I/O setting Error.

duplication. 2nd Ed. Command Error: Error will not clear. Command Error: Service already executing. Unit Error: SYSMAC BUS/2 error. Command Error: Number already defined. Command Error: Incorrect password. Command Error: No protection. Unit Error: Memory Error. Access Right Error: No access right. Command Error: Protected. Unit Error: CPU Bus Unit Error. Abort: Service aborted. 07/13 .Appendix A: Panel & PLC Error Code Tables Omron FINS Protocol – PLC Error Code Table (cont’d) PLC Error Codes for Omron FINS Panel Error Code P499 Hex Value 0x2507 0x2509 0x250A 0x250D 0x250F 0x2510 0x2601 0x2602 0x2604 0x2605 0x2606 0x2607 0x2608 0x2609 0x260A 0x260B 0x3001 0x4001 Unit Error: I/O bus error. Command Error: Settings not complete. Unit Error: SYSMAC BUS No. Unit Error: SYSMAC BUS terminator missing. Command Error: No execution right. Command Error: Service stopped. Description A 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 A B C D A–29 ® EA1-TCL-M Hardware User Manual. A. Command Error: Necessary items not set. Rev.

2nd Ed. The possible PLC generated error codes for the Siemens PPI communication protocols breakdown into a four digit hexadecimal value as shown in the following diagram. Siemens PPI Error Code P499 Breakdown Relay Main response error flag code Sub response code 16-bit Word 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 0 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 P499 Error Code Message Displayed Hexadecimal Value 0 0 0 6 Example of a Siemens PPI error for a “Address out of range.” error. Err Code 0006 Start Stop A–30 ® EA1-TCL-M Hardware User Manual. This value can be looked up in the specific PLC’s error tables to determine the cause of the error. hex Siemens Error Code P499 Message Example: P499: Recv. Rev. The P499 error message includes a four digit hexadecimal value displayed at the end of the message. A.Appendix A: Panel & PLC Error Code Tables A 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 A B C D Siemens Error Code P499 Explanation The P499 error code is used to show any errors that are generated by the connected PLC. 07/13 .

2nd Ed. Address out of range. Block already used in EPROM. 07/13 . Write Data size mismatch. No linked block. Description A 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 A B C D A–31 ® EA1-TCL-M Hardware User Manual. Object already exists. No Block does not exist. Function not supported. Object access not allowed. Rev. Error with block type. Block does not exist. Block name syntax error. Address is invalid. Hardware fault. Object does not exist. PDU Size is incorrect. Access not allowed. Data Type not supported. Block number incorrect. Address out of range. Object already exists. Function being used. Data Type is not consistent with size. Address invalid. Object does not exist.Appendix A: Panel & PLC Error Code Tables Siemens PPI Protocol – PLC Error Code Table PLC PDU Header Errors for S7-200 PPI Panel Error Code P499 Hex Value 0x0001 0x0003 0x0004 0x0005 0x0006 0x0007 0x000A 0x8000 0x8001 0x8101 0x8103 0x8104 0x8105 0x8106 0x8107 0x810A 0x8500 0x8702 0xD201 0xD202 0xD203 0xD204 0xD205 0xD206 0xD207 0xD209 0xD20E 0xD210 Hardware Fault. A. Context not supported. Error with function parameter. Action is not allowed in current mode.

.

. . . .B–2 Panel Errors . . . . . .B–2 . . . . . . . APPENDIX B Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .C-MORE MICRO-GRAPHIC PANEL RUNTIME ERRORS In This Appendix. . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3. Panel Info (Not Project) will be initialized. Use software Ver. Update to current version programming software and panel firmware. Provide 12-24 VDC power to the optional module. Check cables and connections. etc.) 24 VDC power has been lost and the panel is now running on USB External power fail. Mismatch. Transfer the project again. Resend Project File to Panel Panel Check Sum Error.Appendix B: C-more Micro-Graphic Panel Runtime Errors The runtime errors detected by the C-more® Micro-Graphic panel will display in a popup 1 window in the center of the panel display. Rev. each error message will display sequentially for three 6 seconds with a two second delay between each message. Cycle power. Either re-establish the 24 VDC power connection or remove USB cable. that message will display continuously until it is no longer 7 active. B try the following steps in the order shown: 1. Introduction B–2 ® EA1-TCL-M Hardware User Manual. reset panel options. EA-MG-SP1 or EA-MG-P1 optional power adapter module for a C-more Unsupported module detected 3” Micro-Graphic panel is installed on a C-more 6” Micro-Graphic panel. Check for proper grounding Resend the project. R102 EA-MG-SP1 or EA-MG-P1 optional power adapter module is installed on a C-more 3” Micro-Graphic panel without a 12-24 VDC power source. A. To resolve the problem. transformers. Remove the EA-MG-SP1 or EA-MG-P1. The most common cause for runtime errors is a bad serial connection during a project transfer or firmware update.xx. Resend Project file to Panel. The panel was powered in High Power mode (24 VDC power supply. Check the area for sources of noise: electrical motors. Resend the project. all power connections and then reconnect the USB cable for the panel to run in Low-Power mode via the USB connection. See Chapter 8 for Electrical Noise Problems. Cycle power to the panel. Protocol Module Check Sum Error. Micro-Graphic Panel Errors 8 Error Code Error Message Possible Solutions 9 10 11 12 13 14 A B C D R001 R002 R003 R004 R005 R006 R100 R101 PC software tool Timeout CRC Error occurred during project transfer from PC. Cycle power at the panel. Reconnect The bus power. 07/13 . Option module detected without external power From the Setup Menu screen. When only one panel error is active. 4 5 Panel Errors If more than one panel error occurs. Reset factory default system settings. 4. 3 2.xx. 2nd Ed. SW Ver. Project Check Sum Error. Check that all connections are secure and cables are in good condition.

A.3.20 or newer firmware for this panel (Panel Hardware Revision 1 for EA1-S3ML* and EA1-S6ML*) B001 B002 F/W File Check Sum Error. in particular the F/W and Product Model does 6" monochrome and color panels require *.20 or Newer. 2nd Ed.mgs. select the proper file and upgrade firmware.ea1. Upgrade the firmware again.3. B004 1 B 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 A B C D ® EA1-TCL-M Hardware User Manual.0. A file Check Sum Error occurs either when the firmware update was interrupted by loss of power or loss of communication signal OR when the panel flash memory has exhausted it's read/write life. error B001. To resolve the error. 07/13 B–3 . Must use Ver. Check the power supply. the firmware file extension was *. Check the power supply. To resolve the error. New panel models. Rev. To resolve the error. A file CRC Error occurs either when the firmware update was interrupted by loss of power or loss of communication signal OR when the panel flash memory has exhausted it's read/write life. check to make sure all cables are secure. Upgrade the firmware again. Newer versions use *.Appendix B: C-more Micro-Graphic Panel Runtime Errors Panel Errors (cont’d) Boot Loader Errors Error Code Error Message Possible Solutions Prior to version 2. If you get NOT match.ea1 file.mgs firmware file to a panel that requires a *. B003 CRC Error occurred during F/W transfer from PC. you have tried to upgrade firmware using a *. Must Use F/W Ver. check to make sure all cables are secure.ea1 firmware.

.

6–25. 6–18. 3–10 USB-CBL-AB6. 3–12 Communications Ports. 3–2 EA-MG-PGMSW. 6–19. 3–7 EA-MG6-BZ2P. 6–27. 3–2 EA-MG6-BZ2. 3–13 Installation. 3–2 EA-4-COV2. 3–13 Communication Port Adapters. 6–14 Cables from AutomationDirect. B–2 C-more Micro-Graphic Panel Runtime Errors. 3–3 Cables. 6–14 Wiring Diagrams. 3–13 Dimensions. 6–20. 3–12 EA-ADPTR-4. 3–9. 6–17. 6–22. 6–28. 3–12 EA-COMCON-3. 3–2 Agency Approvals. 2–9 . 6–23 User Constructed Cables. B–2 Introduction. 3–2.INDEX A Accessories. 3–2 EA-6-COV2. 6–31. 6–24. 6–29. 6–16. 6–21. 6–32 Chemical Compatibility. 2–10 Clear Screen Overlay. 3–2. 2–2 C C-more Micro-Graphic Panel Runime Errors. 6–24 Wiring Diagrams. 6–26. 6–30. 1–5 Available Models. 8–9 C-more Micro-Graphic Programming Software. B–2 Panel Errors.

Modbus (Koyo). 1–2 K Keypad Bezel. 1–3 exclamation mark. A–7 Allen-Bradley. A–30 F Function Keys Insert Label. 3–8 Cutout. 2–9 EA1-T6CL. 1–3 E Enclosure Clearances. A–4 AutomationDirect CLICK. 4–3 Introduction. 3–7 i–2 ® EA1-TCL-M Hardware User Manual. 07/13 . A–25 Productivity3000. 20-Button Landscape. 9–3 Customizing. A–4 Omron. 9–3 I Installation. A–4 Modicon Modbus RTU.Index EA1-T4CL. 3–6 Dimensions. A–4 Entivity Modbus RTU. 2–8 Error Code P499 Explanation. 1–12 Enclosure Thickness. 3–6 Assembly. A–7 Do-more. A–8 DirectLOGIC. Rev A. A–6 GE. 1–3 notepad. A–13 Modbus. A–5 Siemens. 2–9 Conventions Used. A–4 AutomationDirect DirectLOGIC . 2nd Ed. 3–6 Specifications.

A–2 Mitsubishi FX Protocol. 7–4 Mounting Clip Screw Torque. A–11. A–26 Siemens PPI Protocol.Index Keypad Bezel. A–2 Allen-Bradley DF1 Protocol. 2–8 Mounting Clips. A–19. A–23 Mitsubishi Q / QnA Series. 7–5 Check Transmit and Receive Indicators. 3–11 Cutout. 8–4 M Maintenance. A–14. 7–6 Check Settings under the System Setup Screens. A–29 Omron Host Link Protocol. A–31 ® EA1-TCL-M Hardware User Manual. A–12 C-more Micro-Graphic Panel. A–16. A–23. A–3. 7–3 Check Project Functionality. A–27. A–17. A–4 DirectLOGIC – DirectNET PLC. A. 21-Button Portrait. 4–3 P Panel & PLC Error Code Tables. A–22 Introduction. 7–2 Check Operating Voltage. 3–10 L Lost Firmware – Red ‘Update Mode’ Screen Displayed. 2nd Ed. A–21. 7–2 Run Tests under the System Setup Screens. A–15. 3–9 Specifications. 3–9 Assembly. A–28. 7–2 Check Physical Conditions. A–10 Allen-Bradley DH485 Protocol. Rev. 7–2 Check Operating Environment. A–7 GE SNPX Protocol. 07/13 i–3 . A–9. A–18. A–20. 7–3 Checks from the C-more Micro-Graphic Programming Software. A–7 DirectLOGIC – K-Sequence PLC. 7–6 Cleaning the Display Screen. A–24 Omron FINS Protocol. 7–5 Project Backup.

3–4 Lookup Text. 3–5 Frame. 3–4 Pushbutton. 3–4 Radio Button. 1–6 i–4 ® EA1-TCL-M Hardware User Manual. 3–5 Dynamic Text. 3–5 Scroll Text. 3–4 Tri-State Switch. 3–4 Static Text. 3–4 Recipe. 2–7 EA1-T4CL. 4–4 Panel Dimensions. 2nd Ed. 3–4 Function. 3–5 Graphic Indicator Light. 3–5 Numeric Display. 2–8 Panel Errors. 3–4 Circle. 3–5 Multi-State Bitmap. 3–5 Analog Meter. 3–5 Rectangle. 3–4 Bar Meter. 3–4 Line Graph. 3–4 Indicator Light. 3–4 Numeric Entry. 3–4 Increment/Decrement Value. 8–9 Panel Objects. 3–4 Real Time Graph. 3–4 Bitmap Button. 3–4 Indicator Button. 3–5 Screen Selector. 3–5 Static Bitmap. 3–4 Part Number Key. 3–4 Dynamic Bitmap. 3–4 Adjust Display Contrast.Index Panel Cutout Dimensions (all models). Rev A. 2–7 EA1-T6CL. 3–4 Line. 3–4 Screen Change Pushbutton. 3–5 Switch. 07/13 .

1–14 Step 7 – Providing Power to the C-more 6” Micro-Graphic Panel. 1–7 Step 1 – Unpack and Inspect. 6–4 EA1-T6CL. 6–5 PC Requirements. 6–6 ProductivitySeries. 6–4 EA1-T4CL. 6–7 SOLO Temperature Controller. 1–8 Step 3 – Become Familiar with Available Communication Ports. 6–8 DirectLOGIC DL205 PLCs. 6–10 DirectLOGIC DL405 PLCs and D4-DCM Module. 6–11 Do-more. 1–5 Q Quick Start Steps. 6–7 Instructions for using. 1–13 Step 6 – Connect C-more 6” Micro-Graphic Panel to Computer. 1–15 ® EA1-TCL-M Hardware User Manual.DirectLOGIC PLC's. Mitsubishi. 1–6 Panel Part Number Key. 6–9 DirectLOGIC DL305 PLCs and D3-DCM Module. 1–18 Step 2 – Install Optional Hardware Accessories. D0-DCM Module & DL105 PLCs. 6–2. DL06. 1–4 EA1-T6CL. 6–5 Allen-Bradley PLCs. 6–3 PLC Compatibility and Connection Charts. 1–10 Step 5 – Install the Programming Software and Develop a Project. 2nd Ed. 1–7 Step 10 – Connect C-more 6” Micro-Graphic Panel to PLC. Omron. 6–7 DirectLOGIC DL05. 6–4 Introduction.Index Bezel Part Number Key. 1–6 Password Protection . 6–12 CLICK PLC. D2-DCM Module and WINPLC. Rev. Modicon and Siemens PLCs. A. 1–4 EA1-T4CL. 1–9 Step 4 – Install C-more Micro-Graphic Panel. 07/13 i–5 . 6–7 Product Label Example. 6–7 GE. 3–3 PLC Communications Communication Ports. 1–6 Product Overview. 6–13 GS Drives.

9–2 Replacement Parts Overview. EA-MG-DC-CON. 5–7 Brightness.Index Step 8 – Accessing the C-more 6” Micro-Graphic Panel Setup Screens. 6–34. EA-MG-BZ1-GSK. 9–2 RS-422A/RS-485A Multi-Drop Wiring Diagram Examples. 5–6 Extensions. 6–36. 1–16 Step 9 – Choose C-more 6” Micro-Graphic Panel to PLC Protocol & Cables. 5–6 Versions. 1–17 R Replacement Parts 4” Function Keys Label Inserts EA-MG4-FKL. 5–9 Clear User Memory. 6–35. 9–2 DC Power Connector Part No. 5–6 Specifications. 6–37 S Safety Guidelines. 5–2 i–6 ® EA1-TCL-M Hardware User Manual. 9–2 6” Function Keys Label Inserts EA-MG6-S6ML-FKL. 2nd Ed. 5–6 Protocol. 9–2 Keypad Bezel 2 Mounting Clips Part No. 4–2 Serial Number and Date Code format. 2–3 EA1-T6CL. 2–3 EA1-T4CL. 5–7 Calibration. 9–2 Clear Screen Overlay EA-6-COV2. 5–12 Touch/Key Beep. 5–10 Hourglass. 9–2 Replacement Parts at a Glance. 1–6 Setting Menu. 5–5 Information Menu. 07/13 . 2–5 System Setup Screens. 9–2 Keypad Bezel 1 Gasket Part No. Rev A. 5–6 Memory. EA-MG-S3ML-GSK. 5–8 Setup Menu. 9–2 Panel Gasket Part No. EA-MG-BZ2-BRK. 5–11 Reset to Factory Default. 5–10 Rotation.

5–15 Display Test. 5–2 Test Menu. A. 8–8 Panel Communications Error Code Example.Loop Back Test. Rev. 5–17 Flowchart. 8–4 USB to RS-232 Programming Cable Assembly. 5–14 Touch Panel Test. 8–3 Electrical Noise Problems. 5–15 Serial Port2 . 5–2 Introduction. 5–16 PLC Enquiry Test. 5–2 Setting. 1–2 Test Menu. 8–2 Display is Dim.Index Accessing. 8–7 No User Program. 8–2 Powered from 12-24 VDC. 5–3 Exit. 5–13 Buzzer Test. 8–5 No Communications between Panel and PLC. 8–10 U Updating Firmware. 8–3 Panel & PLC Error Codes. 5–16 Troubleshooting. 8–2 C-more Micro-Graphic Panel does not Power up. 8–2 Powered from 5 VDC. 8–8 Reset to Factory Default. 5–4 Information. 5–2 T Technical Support. 8–2 Display is Blank. 2nd Ed. 4–5 ® EA1-TCL-M Hardware User Manual. 8–10 No Communications between Panel and PC. 1–14 W Wiring Guidelines. 07/13 i–7 .